Home
        Using SmartScore 3
         Contents
1.                         135  Flags and beams  F                        135  Stem direction  S                         135  Accidentals       Soe SSeS 2 Se oe SS oe a a 136  Rests R             eee eee eee eee eee 137  Batliness l   ace eentacere yoni ae sa E SSS See ee Bee 137  Dynamics  P   lt  and  gt                      137  Tuplets  T                                137  Unify Signatures Clefs  U                        137  Note values  Number Pad                     137   Navigator                              138   Transposition                              139   System Manager                            5  143   Instrument Templates                           147   Working with Voices and Colors                      149   Playback Console                          154   Hidden Symbols                             155   Dynamics  Articulations and Tempo Markings                     156   Properties Tool                               162   Repeats and Multiple Endings                         165   Unify Key  Time and Clefs  U                     168   MID to BNE   A a S322 2S ee tee coe eee 170   Troubleshooting ENF Problems                          172       128 USING SmartScore    Chapter 9 Detailed ENF Editing    9 1 More ENF navigating    9 1 1 Split screen and Zoom Window Viewing    The default view is the    split screen    view immediately following rec   ognition  An alternative view is the floating    Zoom Window           FIGURE 9   1  Zoom Window  To use the    Z
2.                       137  Dynamics  P   lt  and  gt                        137  Tuplets  T                              137  Unify Signatures Clefs  U                      137  Note values  Number Pad                      137       USING SmartScore 4    Table of Contents    Navigator                              138  Transposition                               139  System Manager                            143  Instrument Templates                           147  Working with Voices and Colors                       149  Playback Console                               154  Hidden Symbols                            155  Dynamics  Articulations and Tempo Markings                     156  Properties Tool                               162  Repeats and Multiple Endings                         165  Unify Key  Time and Clefs  U                    168  MIDI to ENP         4 2 5  2 2  aise ee ee ee ele Ses a s 170  Troubleshooting ENF Problems                        172  Chapter 10  MIDI Editing and Sequencing                      177  ENF Notation and MIDI Editor Relationship                       177  Opening  Changing and Closing Multiple MIDI Views             179  Track Overview  lt 6 2    See S000  2 SS ess Ge ee eee 180  Playback                              182  Spacebar       lt 6  e he ee ee ee ee 182  Mini Console                            182  MIDI Devices                             183  Playback Range                        184  Piano Roll Gs 2 eGo liek ee eRe SE eee ek 1
3.                   What Edition does what                           Parts and Voices in SmartScore                      What to do when this manual does not help                      USING SmartScore    Chapter 1 Introduction to SmartScore    1 1 What SmartScore does     1 1 1 Scan and play    With SmartScore  you are able to scan  recognize and playback sheet  music in just minutes  To listen  just hit the space bar  Assign different  MIDI sounds to each instrumental part and recreate a band or an  orchestral performance  Assign different sounds to contrapuntal voices  to create interesting and unusual textures of sound or to emphasize  inner voices in complex arrangements  Recognition of dynamics  artic   ulations  repeats and endings gives added nuance and realism during  playback  Students can listen to an unfamiliar piece before learning it   Practice along while playing back at various tempos without altering  pitch or key  Mute or solo one or more parts on the fly  Parts selected  by name are automatically assigned proper MIDI instruments and  maintain playback continuity even with optimized scores  Transposed  instruments notated in different keys will play back in tune  Automati   cally add drum tracks to playback    choose from many preset styles or  create your own drum tracks from imported MIDI files  You can even  record playback to audio CD with the built in CD Writer     1 1 2 Scan and work    While playback of sheet music has its uses  it is just the beginning 
4.                  25    Scanning in Windows                             25  Using the SmartScore Scanning Interface                       26  Automatic image enhancement functions                       27  Scanner settings                             29  Choosing an alternative scanning interface                     30   Working with HP Scanners in Windows                     31   Scanning for Macintosh                         32  Scanner drivers for Mac                        32  Selecting a scanner                         33  Selecting the SmartScore Scanning Interface                   33  Choosing Your Scanner   s Interface  Automatic                 34  Scanner settings                              35  Choosing Your Scanner   s Interface  Manual                   36   Recognition Sequence                            37  Recognition Options                             38  Post Recognition                           4    Scanning Outside of SmartScore                      42   Selecting Pre scanned Files for Processing                   43   Scanning Part Scores  Score Parts                        45   Recognition Accuracy                          46  Troubleshooting Scanning and Recognition                     48   Image Editor                              50       24 USING SmartScore    Chapter 3 Scanning and Recognition    3 1 Scanning Music    Be sure you have the necessary scanner drivers installed before  attempting to scan from inside SmartScore  Most scanners come wit
5.          FIGURE 4   16  ENF Tempo Controller    4 5 6 Normalize controllers    Playback may result in greater than desired changes after altering  either tempo or velocity controllers  If so  you may globally reduce the  effects of either controller by applying normalizing        USING SmartScore 69    ENF Playback       Normalize Tempo controller  Before     imi    Tempo controller after normalizing by 80     FIGURE 4   17  Normalizing Tempo  To reduce effects of either Tempo or Velocity graphical controllers  a  Choose Playback  gt  Graphical Controller  b  Select either Normalize Tempo or Normalize Velocity     c  Choose amount of reduction desired  20    40    60  or 80    Controller display and playback will change accordingly     d  Choosing Reset removes all controller changes and resets the  default settings     NOTE  Additional Tempo markings inserted into ENF will still take  affect  The end result is an averaging of tempo values   4 5 7 Controller background views  e Invisible  Graphical controllers are not visible in this view  It is the default view   e Line    In Line view  controller is displayed in the foreground with notation  displayed in grey in the background        70 USING SmartScore          ENF Playback  e Filled      In Filled view  notation is obscured entirely with controller in fore   ground     e Background       In Background view  notation is displayed in the foreground and the  graphical controller appears in grey in the background     4 5 8 Se
6.         USING SmartScore 99    Editing Text and Symbols  You can easily change mis recognized fret diagrams in the ENF editor   To change an existing guitar fret   chord symbol     a  Ctrl   click on any existing fret symbol  or select the fret symbol  from the Text and Controllers Toolbar   Your cursor should  change to a    fretboard       b  Toggle the    C    key to Change mode  fretboard with arrow     c  Click on any existing fretboard symbol  The Guitar Chord  library will open with the selected symbol displayed  If the  selected fret is not found in the Guitar Chord Library  a C major  chord will be displayed        te      T Long ree Foon bent mii eee TI mh  S  gone afi           m   cm      FIGURE 6   6  Guitar frets and chord symbols library  d  Select the desired chord from Root pull down menu   e  Select sharp  flat  Tonality  Extension and Augmentation     NOTE  More than one chord can apply to the same parameters  When  Primary is checked  that chord pattern will be selected before  other chords having duplicate parameters     f  Click OK  The fret diagram and chord symbol will update   To insert a fret   chord symbol from the Guitar Chord library     a  Push the fretboard symbol in the Text and Controllers toolbar     Insert Guitar   Chord Symbol    FIGURE 6   7  Guitar Fret Symbol          1 00 USING SmartScore    Editing Text and Symbols  b  Click above the staff line where you wish to insert the symbol     6 5 1 Creating and changing chord symbols in the GC
7.      4 7 Instrument Templates    Instrument Templates makes up the    pool    from which instruments are  assigned to stafflines in System Manager  To open Instrument Tem   plates  select Edit  gt  Instrument Templates or hit Ctrl   F Win   Cmnd   F Mac   Most common musical instruments are listed in the  Names column  Abbreviations  MIDI instruments and transposed play   back have been preassigned  but may be changed     leabriment Temjlaies    maia    Piara  Gora Pi    acii Fana Pibodas E Piara  WB amei Hapit  E A   Chunh Goa    HS ii i Church Grgar  GB Fei    Inutureand J ettrco    tao      Appi hect eligi m ia al juhan Fler       FIGURE 4   19  Instrument Templates    Part Names in System Manager are directly linked to instrument  Names in Instrument Templates  When a Part Name is selected in the  System Manager  all playback parameters are derived from Instrument  Templates     4 7 1 Transposed instruments    Since transposed instruments do not actually play the pitches notated in  the score  to play them back in tune with the other non transposed  instruments  they must have their playback adjusted up or down by cer   tain intervals  This    playback transposition    is already preset in Instru   ment Templates for most transposed instruments        USING SmartScore 73    Lyric  Koracke    ENF Playback       4 7 2 Adding instruments    You can add new instruments with unique names and playback param   eters as well as change existing names and parameters in any template
8.      Continue to select parts for any other type of group  Any selected    group can overlap parts of another selected group       Click    Break Barline by Brackets    checkbox to have barlines    break according to instrument families which are already desig   nated by braces  groups and grand staffs     Choose Clear Sel or Clear Selected Parts in selected group or  Clear All to remove groupings        104    USING SmartScore    Editing Text and Symbols       USING SmartScore 105    Percussion clef  Clefs Palette                             Automatic Drum Patterns                             Virtual Drum Kit       106    USING SmartScore      ol    MIDI    Me d    coc  om  D     Chapter 7 Working with Drums    SmartScore has some really nice drum features including MIDI support  for the percussion clef  automatic drum patterns and a    drum kit    which  records a drum track by tapping keys on your computer keyboard     7 1 Percussion clef  Clefs Palette     When the Percussion Clef is entered on a staffline  the MIDI channel  assignment for that staff and part switches to 10  the default drum chan   nel  Notes can be entered  deleted and pitch shifted normally  and will  playback as MIDI drums  The percussion clef works in den tic ally as  all other clefs  including Unify Clefs  See Section 9 15 3 on page 170      7 1 1 Playback  gt  Drumset    Drum sounds are associated with every line and space of the drum clef  staff  Accidentals are ignored regardless of the key of the
9.      and hitting the    L    key  The rel   ative positions of these joined notes will be swapped without altering  voice color or playback     ia      Highlight with Select Tool Positions swap with    L    key    FIGURE 4   11  Swapping horizontal positions of offset notes  4 4 6 Options  gt  Align Joined Voices    Offset voices that are joined will have simultaneous    start    times for   playback  By default  joined notes and rests become vertically aligned   Sometimes  especially in cases where notes are particularly dense  you  may not want horizontal movement  To keep joined notes and rests off   set  go to Options  gt  Align Joined Voices and remove the check mark        66 USING SmartScore    ENF Playback  4 5 Altering Playback  4 5 1 Lock to Time Signature    SmartScore allows for two kinds of playback     Play what   s there    or  Lock to Time Signature  With Playback  gt  Lock to Time Signature  check marked  every measure plays back with the exact number of  beats indicated in the default time signature  If the ENF file contains  editing errors  this may result in dropped notes during playback or in  the case of pickup measures and    split    measures  it will cause a pause  to be heard  With Lock to Time Signature turned off  whatever is writ   ten in each measure will be played back regardless of the current time  signature  If the ENF file contains errors  this option may result in  irregular meter  lengthened or shortened measures  Either option is use   fu
10.     O    key to activate the Select tool   b  Click and drag a box around any series of notes     c  Press the    S    key to reverse the stem direction of the highlighted  notes     In Change mode  an existing note stem can be reversed by right click   ing  Windows  on any existing notehead  Option   click for Mac      9 3 8 Accidentals    To insert an accidental     a  Select any accidental from the    Notes    or    Articulations    palette   bb b  Toggle the    C    key to Insert mode        sa      c  Click on the notehead that is to receive the marking   To change an accidental     e Select an accidental from the    Notes    palette  Toggle the    C    key  until a white arrow appears and click on a notehead to change     To delete an accidental     e Press the    X    key with any accidental active in cursor and click  on a notehead to remove its associated accidental     A courtesy accidental is bounded by parentheses and acts as a reminder  that a note has an accidental  normally used when notation becomes  dense  MIDI playback ignores these    redundant    accidentals     To insert a courtesy accidental     e Press the parentheses button when any accidental is selected  before clicking a notehead        136 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing  9 3 9 Rests  R     Press the    R    key to automatically select a quarter rest for editing      Shift         R    will select an eighth rest     9 3 10 Barlines  I     Hit the    I    key to select a standard barline fo
11.     Tche      bh                          Tm        JEg ef ar foo 5    k             FIGURE 10   14  Select Event window    Select All tracks or an individual track or voice to highlight for cut   paste  pitch shifting or assigning parameters  Choose Full time to dis   play the full length of the MIDI file or designate a portion of the file to  display by entering the measure  beat  and tick into the From and To  fields     NOTE  Edit  gt  Select All is only available from a Piano Roll or Event  List view     Selecting MIDI events using mouse click and drag can be done from  any view  Mouse functions work the same in all views     To select a note or group of notes     e Click on the individual note or click and drag to Group Select  many notes     To add note s  to the Group   e Hold down the Control key and click on the unselected note s    To select note events within a given time frame     a  Click in Piano Roll to mark the beginning of the time frame     b  Hold down the Shift key and click again to set the end of the  timeframe  The selected range will highlight in grey        USING SmartScore 189    MIDI Editing and Sequencing  10 5 7 Changing MIDI event characteristics  To change the start time of selected note event s      e Click and drag the left edge of the note s  to the position you  want           FIGURE 10   15  Editing MIDI note on off events    To change the duration of selected note event s      e Click and drag the right edge of a note to change a note   s
12.     palette     FIGURE 5   4  Creating a Tuplet or Slur       USING SmartScore 85    Editing Notes and Rests    a  Click and drag down to insert the tuplet or legato above the notes  to be selected     b  Click and drag up to insert the tuplet or legato below the notes to  be selected     c  Press the    X    key and click on the tuplet or legato to delete it   NOTE  To move a tuplet bracket up or down  use Edit Shapes mode     e Nested tuplets  tuplet within a tuplet     Choose the value required from the    Rhythmic Groups    palette  Click  and drag the mouse pointer to select a tuplet group within another  tuplet  A bracket will drop identifying the nested tuplet     e User defined Tuplet    Other than the common triplet  quintuplet  etc  it may be necessary to  create a unique rhythmic group  Divisions   the number of equally  divided notes  Value   total duration equal to one undivided note times  the number selected  E g  a quarter note triplet defaults as follows   Divisions   3   Value   2   Total duration of 2 quarter notes divided  equally into three                     5 4 12 Ties    Ties connect contiguous notes of the same pitch causing the first note to  sound for the duration of both notes  Ties are not the same as slurs     a  While in the Insert mode  hit the    V    key or press a Tie button in  L   the    Notes    palette     b  Click on the notehead of the first note of a tied pair to insert the  tie with a downward arc     c  Right click  option   click 
13.    249       210 USING SmartScore    E            s    i       Chapter 11 Reference    11 1 Properties Tool    Playback properties of many markings  including dynamics and articu   lations  may be adjusted singly or globally with the use of the Proper   ties Tool located in the SmartScore toolbar  See Section 9 12    Properties Tool  on page 162 for more details     11 2 Tool Palettes    11 2 1 Notes and rests  See    General Note Editing    on page 80     11 2 2 Articulations  Turn to    Articulations and Trills    on page 159 for editing details   e Slur  Legato     Note durations associated with slurs are increased about 10  giving an  overlapping or    connected    effect when played back        Turn    Click on note head or note stem apply a turn  Turns play back as fol   lows     a a    F   feete   FIGURE 11   1  Turn  e Fermata  bird   s eye     Click on note head or note stem to apply a fermata  Tempo is slowed by  50  for the duration of the note to which the fermata is attached     e Staccato       USING SmartScore 211    Reference    Click on note head to apply a staccato  Duration of the associated note  is shortened by 25      e Tenuto    Click on note head to apply a tenuto  Duration of the associated note is  extended by 125      e Accent    Click on note head to apply an accent  Accent increases the velocity of  its associated note by 150      e Soft Accent    Click on note head to apply a soft accent  Soft accent increases the  velocity of its associated note
14.    3 ag Orientation   inches   inches Portrait h    First System Indent     Do not change ai     bs bed S   Scope   Score Zi  Bottom   0 0   inches Cancel    FIGURE 11   10  Page Setup          To open Page Setup  go to File  gt  Page Setup    a  Adjust margins  if necessary  by either dragging margin line in  page preview window or by setting amount in top  bottom or side  fields     b  Apply changes using the Scope pull down menu  Select Score to  apply changes to the entire ENF file  Choose Part to apply  changes only to current score part  Choose Page to apply to cur   rent page     11 3 9 File  gt  Print Preview    Selecting this option gives you a page views in a horizontal format  See  page 231   View  gt  True Scrolling  for more information about pre   viewing pages in horizontal or vertical format        220 USING SmartScore    Reference  11 3 10 File  gt  Print  Ctrl P  Cmnd P   To Print the active ENF document     e Only the active  topmost  ENF file will print  To print other open  EMF files  select  click on  the desired ENF file first     11 3 11 File  gt Save As PDF    If you are using Windows or Macintosh OS x  you can save your  SmartScore ENF files as Adobe   Acrobat   PDF files     Windows Only     PDF995 exe   resides in the SmartScore folder and is installed during  normal installation  PDF995 launches automatically when invoked in  ENF  The utility appears in your list of printers whenever you invoke  Print in an other applications     hare Qareec Poti 
15.    Ead    Cop iig  as    A koe iw  Po Reechm F Poche  M Five M sam M caia    Ir at andi of Papaa iS veri  P Lind ecru of Recent Saar    D Tabi panes a rating a Pia or      Pansa  PP L hara of Eeng a    M dom r  F 4  Five mera ey       FIGURE 10   21  Measure Settings  To insert a change of Tempo   e Adjust tempo with the Tempo slider   To insert a change of Time Signature     e Use the Time Sign pull down menus to select the number of  beats per measure and the base measure unit  2 Half note   4 Quarter note  8 Eighth note  etc      To insert a change of Key Signature     e Select the number of accidentals in the new Key Signature with  the pull down menu  Mark the key as major or minor with the  radio buttons next to the pull down menu     Press OK to make the changes current through the end of the active  MIDI file        1 94 USING SmartScore    Hr WW    WN    MIDI Editing and Sequencing  10 5 11 Setting Repeats and Multiple Endings    While you are more likely to insert repeats and multiple endings in  ENF view  they can also be edited in the Measure Settings window in  Overview or Piano Roll view  Double click any measure number to  open the Measure Settings window of that measure     e Simple Repeats    Check the 15 Measure of Repeat box to select a measure as the begin   ning of the repeated section     Use the   of Passes scroller to determine the total number of times this  section will be played  For example  If you want the section to play  through and repeat one t
16.    For more information on Instrument Templates  turn to    Instrument  Templates    on page 147  For more information on the System Man   ager  turn to    System Manager    on page 143     4 8 Add drum tracks    Adding an automatic drum track will add more pizazz to the mix     Push the    Drum Pattern    button in the SmartScore toolbar to select an  appropriate pattern for your piece  For more information on adding or  creating drum tracks  go to  Automatic Drum Patterns   Section 7 2  on  page 108     4 9 Karaoke View    Feel like singing out loud  Hey  you only live once     To view moving lyrics with familiar bouncing ball     a  Press the Karaoke View button in the floating Navigator palette     b  Use the floating mini console transport buttons to control play   back     c  Open the Playback Console  Ctrl   9   Cmnd   9 for Mac  to  adjust tempo and change instrument assignments for parts and  voices        74 USING SmartScore    ENF Playback       USING SmartScore    75    Navigating Inside an ENF Document                      77    Preliminary Cleanup                         78  ENF Editing Modes                          79  General Note Editing                             80  Undo                             80  Tool Palettes  F2 F9 keys                       81  Grace Notes  Ssss 2 oie e siana a E eiae EE Ss es EE 81  Select tool     O    key                           81  VOICECOlOP  Gib a SSG SS Sl Sy Gere es oS 82  Error Check                              83  Pi
17.    Gem a To A          Joce a    FIGURE 8   2  System Manager  displaying active system        USING SmartScore 115    Changing Score Structure    c  Check the box    Visibility    in lower left hand corner of the win   dow  This informs the System Manager of the kind of action we  are taking     d  Now we will choose which parts to extract  To the left of the  parts you do not wish to extract  remove the visibility check   marks  This leaves only the part s  you wish to extract with  checkmarks     e  Press Apply to New to create a new score  leaving the current file  unaffected  Or press OK to remove parts from the open docu   ment     FIGURE 8   3  is the result of the System Manager settings made in  FIGURE 8   2        FIGURE 8   3  Extracted vocal Part    8 1 2 Extracting voices using Visibility    Let   s go back to the original ENF document in FIGURE 8   1  Let   s say  we want to extract a contrapuntal voice from the right hand part     To extract a voice from an existing part     a  Select Edit  gt  System Manager  Ctrl M  Cmnd M Mac       b  Click the dot next to the Part Name to highlight the target part   Remove checkmarks of all parts and voices except for the part  and voice you wish to target        116 USING SmartScore    Changing Score Structure    M Petre  T i r Specng iope ta fia o    id cay a ST  S       FIGURE 8   4  Selecting Voices to be extracted    c  Make sure    Visibility    in lower left hand corner is checked     d  Press Apply to New to create 
18.    Rests    palette   c  Click on any existing note or rest to change to selected value     NOTE  When you QuickSelect  Ctrl   Click  on any object inside the  active staff  the palette associated with the object will open           132 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing  9 2 3 Delete by Group   Delete Any  X     Press the    X    key of your computer keyboard to toggle between the  Delete by Group and Delete Any modes     In the Delete by Group mode  the cursor becomes an arrow with the  selected object type in grey  In the Delete Any mode the cursor  becomes an arrow with an    X    next to it        e Delete by Group mode removes any object clicked on that is  found in the active Tool Palette but no other object    Sl e Delete Any mode removes any notation object that is clicked  with the mouse     NOTE  This delete will remove an entire chord  To remove a single  note from a chord  hit the    X    then    Z     cluster  key  Click a  note    To delete any object in the active staff    a  Toggle the    X    key to Delete Any mode   b  Click on any object     i Y  TIP  For the occasional object that does not respond to normal click   p   to delete action  use the Select tool     O    key   Hit the Delete  key to remove all selected objects     9 3 Select Tool  O     9 3 1 Using the Select tool for quick deletions    Use the Select tool  letter    O    key  to highlight more than one object   Many functions including mass delete  mass pitch shift  vertical align   ment
19.    b  With the mouse pointer  drag to select notes in the active staff        FIGURE 11   8  Octava       214 USING SmartScore    Reference    Notice that the Octava or Octavo mark will appear at the beginning of  the range of selected notes an the applied range will be indicated by a  dashed line above the selected notes     When the Percussion clef is entered on a staffline  MIDI channel  assignment of the staff switches to 10  the default drum channel  Notes  can be entered normally  but will playback only as MIDI drums  Note  pitch to MIDI drum assignments are mapped in Drumset option under  the Playback menu  Refer to    Playback  gt  Drumset    on page 107 to  assign drums       e Percussion clef    11 2 4 Barlines and Repeats  See    Repeats and Multiple Endings    on page 165     11 2 5 Signatures  Key and Time   To change an existing key or time signature to another signature     NOTE  It is possible to change one or all key signatures in a system   In Insert mode  all staves of the system are updated to the  inserted key signature  In Change mode  only the staff line  where the change is made will be affected  This is particularly  useful for transposed instruments     a  Select a new signature from the tool palette   b  Hit the    C    key to toggle to the Change mode     c  Click on the signature to be change        NOTE  The key of C major  A minor  does not have a visible sign to  indicate its presence  If no key signature is visible in the first  measure of the
20.   Aay Ajun   ppa  Hesu     umeg   SHed YUll oy    pumoay    opuadsa ineg i         HUS WMI  lt   gt     opuadsai gt  71     HYS UUM    soiweudq d    osse     001 33S    6d    Caua E rueuna     z4 H 94 f  S3    Eppa   Mosul   Oq  3 880  uong WAS    3 8801 uong we  g    JONVHD    LYASNI    ANY 313730    343130      XILSNTD   JIONIS          uondo  ye                                                                       ajosuoy yoeqde d   6  tuayshs 1a SPW   W  Sunayerg   g  Suyuq Wed   7   aseg 0709 9  s  ejdw    zu  wnysul   S  MIA IAIW M  N        sodsuesj   1  dejd  y   a seq   Y  yay  40449  3    ALND YEM       wa shs apis no saAow   JOSINI   JIYM Wa sds IAY   se W  JS  S JUdIND SUIE UIEW JUJ  PIOH   wayshs annoy   pUJ          suore asuey  pue y  suj 404  p  p  j  s s  wo2  q p  fqo p        PIBSPIND   YD   NUD    youd a8ueyd o   3u Seup pue poy    dey shay yong  JOUPA AN    dX   AW   LN   XZ   6  SMOPUT   104    FIGURE 9   26  Quick Keys Map  Windows        USING SmartScore    174    Detailed ENF Editing    QuicK Keys Map  Mac     3 830  weog   Sejy    ppq   esul  AL   Sal  9 9 9q 0  UOISay PAPS  Sd ON Weag 0  UOISay PAPS  Sano P  S   S323104 p325 uror   pD Swi 4Y Apun   PPa M  sul    ueg   syed yuij   y    asned    pum  y I   keja    opuadsanag ff  j     WYS YM f  lt   gt     OpU2S  4J 1  HYS UUM    sonmeudg do    osse   J001 Pajas    6d 84    lodwa tk Ss HWEUAG     Ld    J  a s  naa MIO   Pe ty   94 cj bs     ci za      a 9J9q   Hosu  Od    3 83830  UOIP2IG WAS    3 830
21.   Insert Above Insert Below Remove    NOTE  When an ENF score structure is changed by adding or delet   ing staves and or systems from the Edit menu  synchroniza   tion with the scanned images will be lost  We recommend  that you complete all needed edits corrections or save a copy  of the ENF file before using the Edit menu to change struc   ture of your scanned music  See    View  gt Associate Image  Files    on page 232 for information on keeping synchroniza   tion     Use this feature to insert an entire empty system above or below the  currently active system  Use to delete a system  if you need to        USING SmartScore 225    Reference  a  Position the mouse pointer over the current system to make it  active     b  Hit the CapLock button  On  and select the function you want  from the Edit menu  Press CapLock again to release active staff     TIP  Hitting the CapLock button  On  keeps the active staff selected    an    until CapLock is pressed again  Off   Use this    Hold Active  Staff    feature before selecting any of the Add or Remove staff  and system functions under the Edit menu     c  To remove a system from a score  position the cursor over the  system you wish to delete and select Edit  gt  System  gt  Remove     11 4 14 Edit  gt  Staff  gt  Insert Above Insert Below Remove    Use this feature to expand or collapse a system  This will add a new  part to the system and also add a new part to the Super System  Make  sure you hold down the Ctrl button before mo
22.   O    key  and highlight a group of horizon   tally offset notes or rests  See FIGURE 4   9      b  Press the    Y    key to group the selected  offset notes into a single  vertical event  Selected voices may move or jump slightly closer        To globally join offset voices  automatic method      NOTE  The following procedure is    global    and may result in joining  voices which do not belong to the same vertical event  Use  caution when employing this procedure  Less is better        USING SmartScore 65    ENF Playback    a  Press the    J    key or select Join Voices from the Edit menu     CE    Isi peran hanria kiser io misi  aw ii bakea  TT     i L Je    FIGURE 4   10  Join Voices    b  Notes and rests belonging to different voices will be joined to the  same vertical event based on the distance selected  1 through 20    These units are arbitrary  The default is 6  It is recommended not  to change distance more than 2 or 3 units at a time     NOTE  Be careful not to overdo it  You may inadvertently join voices  that ought to be syncopated  Always playback and listen after  joining voices  If you wind up with sewing machine or worse   you can always UNDO  Ctrl   Z Win   Cmnd   Z Mac      c  Press OK and hit the spacebar to audition     4 4 5 Swapping offset voices  Select      L        Occasionally  you will want to swap the horizontal positions of a pair  of joined offset notes  This can easily be done by selecting a vertically  aligned pair with the Select Tool     O
23.   SmartScore has intelligent tools that will enable you to transform your  scanned score into virtually any configuration  You can transpose and  print out your music into a new key including any changes of key  time  and clef  Transpose globally or by selected region  by key or by clef   Transform a viola part in C to a horn part in F  Recognized guitar frets  and chord symbols automatically transpose along with notes and key  symbols  Instrumental parts or contrapuntal voices can be extracted to  new SmartScore documents using Visibility in the System Manager   Solo part scores can be scanned in and joined into a conductor   s score  with drag and drop ease using Score Structure  Preserve proper play   back of instruments that appear and disappear throughout the score by       USING SmartScore 1    Introduction to SmartScore       using Part Linking tool  Fine object repositioning in Edit Shapes  refines the look of your score giving you a professional finish  Printed  output can be reformatted by resizing staffline  staff and system spac   ing and page margins  It   s all possible with SmartScore     1 1 3 Turn MIDI files into music notation    Transform your favorite MIDI files into engraver quality music nota   tion  If the MIDI file contains complex voicing in a track  SmartScore  can separate them into independent voicelines  If voices are joined into  chords  use SmartScore   s voice splitting tool to separate them into dis   crete contrapuntal voices     1 1 4 Create
24.   UONDeJIG we  g    JONVHD    LYASNI    ANY 414740   31313Q    wasn   FIONIS          uondo  ye                                                                         ajosuoy ypeqheyd   6  Wwaysis 1a SeWV   W  Sunjoypeig   g   Suyur  Hed   1   adeg 0909 9  sayejdwiay zu  wnysu    S  Mal IGIW M  N      asodsuesy       anejday   ayseg   Y  ypay  10137   J       sonuodosd yoru  GIW    M  N JOyouetg    UONPAUIP     ISAY   A  sways ajou dijy       Bueyy       Ady MNM       Aay Yondo  ie YY M                WaysAS   pIS NO SAOU   JOSIND   JIYM WAS  S IAY   se wayshs JUBIIND SUIEPUIEW   U    PIOH   waysds annoy   PUD       suonpe asuey  pue m  su  404  papajas saworaq p  lqo p    P  S PIND   YD   PUD    yoyid asueyp 0   ajou Sep pue poy    dey shay xON D    JOUPH ANA     701 SO   78 SO  Yysoyurey  104    FIGURE 9   27  Quick keys Map  Mac        175    USING SmartScore    ENF Notation and MIDI Editor Relationship                       177    Opening  Changing and Closing Multiple MIDI Views             179  Track Overview                            180  Playback                                182  Spacebat    lt  aE ese ete ee sts ee sete ee 182  Mini Console                            182  MIDI Devices                           5  183  Playback Range                        184  Piao Roll   2 tere 49 oo es ed en SS es CS  eine ete 184  Velocity and Tempo Graphical Controllers                   185  Switching between tracks                         186  Sh  tle Tool s esa g S  Sete c
25.   c  Push the    Adjust Quality    link and change Resolution to 300   350 or 400 as required     d  Push    Scan     Image will be transferred to SmartScore for saving  and recognition  If a warning that resolution is 7 dpi appears   reset resolution     NOTE  If problems still occur  scan outside of SmartScore  See  below  Refer to basic settings    Scanning Outside of Smart   Score    on page 42     3 3 3  Scanning Outside of SmartScore  with HP scanners   e HP PrecisionScan scanning interfaces  Win Only   For HP scanner models 5100  5200  and 5300  PrecisionScan      a  Choose Settings  gt  Preferences from the main program window        USING SmartScore 31    Scanning and Recognition    b  Click the tab labeled    Auto Detect      c  Remove the check mark for    Detect regions on the page      d  Set Resolution to 300 to 400 dpi     For HP scanner models 5370  6200  6300  and 7400  PrecisionScan  Pro      a  Choose    Output Type    from the menu bar   b  Select    Black and White      c  Set Resolution to 300 to 400 dpi     For HP scanner models 3200  3300  4100  and 4200  PrecisionScan  LT  and for HP scanner models 2100  2200  3400  and 4300  Preci   sionScan LTX      a  Choose Settings  gt  Output Type menu option   b  Select    Black and White      c  Set Resolution to 300 to 400 dpi     3 4 Scanning for Macintosh      NOTE  Mac Scanning Notification  Many Mac scanners are not  fully TWAIN compatible  In order for SmartScore to control  a scanning device  it must be
26.   from Voice Tool combo  button in the SmartScore Toolbar     b  Locate the note or rest for which you want to change voice color     c  Click on the note or rest to change it to the selected color and  voice     TIP  When editing a measure containing multiple voices  voice col   ors may change to green and blue as you insert or delete notes  and rests  Ignore these changes until the entire measure is fully  edited  Once edited correctly  colors should appear normal  that  is  mostly black  Voice 1  and red  Voice 2      NOTE  Ties between notes belonging to different voices will not sus   tain during playback     9 8 3 Options  gt  Color Mode  gt  Part    In Part mode  all notes within a staffline become assigned to a single  MIDI channel  stem directions  vertical events and other characteristics  that differentiate contrapuntal voicelines are ignored  In Color by Part  mode  each staff assumes a unique color as defined in Instrument Tem   plates  This is most useful in orchestral scores that contain one part per  staff  allowing for quick visual referencing of each instrument by its  color        15 0 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing  To change default staff colors when Color Mode  gt  Part  gt  Color     a  Select Options  gt  Define Colors  gt  Part Color    b  Instrument Templates will open  Double click the color of a  given part and choose a new color you want associated with that    part  Push OK    9 8 4 Changing colors of hidden symbols and backgrounds  To 
27.   go to File  gt  Scan Music and select  a plug in for your scanner if it is visible  Then push the Scan but   ton in the Navigator or select File  gt  Scan Music  gt Acquire     b  If you do not see your plug in listed in File  gt  Scan Music  gt   Select Scanner  go to your scanner   s installed directory  folder    look for a    Plug in    file with an    Escher    icon and make a copy  of it  Cmnd   D   Drag the copied plug in to the Plug Ins folder  inside the SmartScore folder   To search for plug ins  click on  the desktop  select File  gt  Find and search for    plug in        NOTE  If you own Adobe   Photoshop    your scanner plug in will be  found inside Photoshop  gt  Plug ins folder     NOTE  Older plug ins and drivers may not work with SmartScore  If  so  try downloading the most current TWAIN driver or plug   in from your scanner manufacturer   s web site     3 4 3 Selecting the SmartScore Scanning Interface    Default scanning control is set to SmartScore   s interface  File  gt  Scan  Music  gt  Choose Interface  gt  SmartScore   s         USING SmartScore 33    Scanning and Recognition    a  Push the Sean in the Navigator or select File  gt  Scan Music  gt   Acquire  The SmartScore scanning interface should open  Func   tions available within this interface are described in    Using the  SmartScore Scanning Interface    on page 26    Navigator       FIGURE 3   6  Scan Button  Macintosh     b  After you have scanned in one page  you will be given several  opti
28.   see     Articulations and Trills    on page 159     4 5 11 Swing    This very cool feature applies standard swing rhythm to straight 8th  and 16th notes notated in beamed groups  If the header in the original  music says    swing    or gives a similar marking  SmartScore will modify  playback and the underlying MIDI representation as follows     Te    4 5 12 Refresh MIDI    ENF and MIDI Views are tightly integrated  Occasionally  data in one  view may conflict with data in another resulting in playback that is not  anticipated  If this happens  select MIDI Refresh from the Playback  menu  MIDI Refresh will update playback based only on the ENF  View  Any changes made in MDI view including tracks added during  MIDI recording  Step Time or Real Time  will be lost  You will be  given a chance to save the    pre refresh    playback as a MIDI file before  updating based on ENF display  For more information about MIDI  Refresh  refer to    Updating and refreshing playback and display    on  page 177     4 6 Repeats and Endings    Repeat signs  including Repeat Last Measure  and ending markings   including Codas and Segnos  from the    Barlines and Repeats    palette    66 a22    will alter playback accordingly  Using the    n    repeat barline will allow       72  USING SmartScore    ENF Playback    you to set beginning and ending measures of a multiple ending  For  more details on repeats  multiple endings and Codas and Segnos  see     Repeats and Multiple Endings    on page 165
29.   voice splitting  flipping stem directions and copy paste work  with the Select tool  Its button can be found in the SmartScore toolbar        To delete a group of objects including notes  rests and symbols     a  Use the Select tool  O  to select only the range of objects to  delete  Do not highlight an entire system   b  Hit the Delete key     Occasionally  you might find an area full of incorrectly recognized ties  and or slurs or hairpins  Use this tool to    mass delete    these objects        USING SmartScore 1 33    Detailed ENF Editing    To mass delete ties and articulations   a  Use the Select tool  O  to select an entire region for cleanup  Edit   gt  Select All  Ctrl   A  will select everything on the current page   b  Hit the    G    key  Only articulations will be deleted  All other  notation objects remain unaffected     To delete an entire system     a  Use the Select tool  O  and highlight an entire system     b  Hit the Delete key  The system will be deleted  All subsequent  systems will scroll upwards replacing the gap     9 3 2 Using the Select Tool  O  to edit selected objects    A group of selected notes on the same staff can be transformed into one  beamed group if they are flagged or they can be pitch shifted at once     To convert a sequence of flagged notes into one beamed group   a  Use the Select tool  O  to select a group of adjacent flagged notes  to be beamed together   b  Hit the    B    key to form the flagged notes into a beamed group     To
30.  5  Edit Shapes   repositioning Lyrics    TIP  Rather than repositioning a lot of lyrics  try reducing lyric font  size  See    Changing styles of Text and Lyrics    on page 96     6 4 3 Using Edit Shapes to verify associations    Nudging note heads horizontally is a great way to verify that a particu   lar lyric block is indeed associated with a note stem  Besides verifying  notes with lyric blocks  Edit Shapes is extremely useful in verifying  that vertical events are properly aligned  Refer to    Vertical Alignment  and offset voices    on page 64 for more information     To verify vertical alignment of two or more voices     a  Open Edit Shapes  Horizontally nudge the upper note  Voice  1   of a vertically aligned set of notes and or rests  All vertically  aligned  joined  notes or rests will move together     b  To exit Edit Shapes mode  push the Edit Shapes button again     6 5 Guitar Frets and Chord Symbols    Guitar fret diagrams are recognized automatically  Frets and their asso   ciated chord symbols also update with key transposition  You can  choose to display either the chord symbol or the fret diagram  or both   It is important to understand that each corresponding chord symbol is  automatically tied to the fret diagram  For a chord symbol to have     intelligence    by itself  that is  for it to change with key transposition   its associated fret diagram must be recognized or inserted first  Alpha   numeric chord symbols may be recognized  but only as dumb text
31.  Ae    a ee Sa ced j    FIGURE 10   13  Instrument Settings       USING SmartScore 187    MIDI Editing and Sequencing      Select the MIDI Port of the MIDI instrument you will be adjust     ing with the MIDI Port pull down menu       Choose a specific Instrument Bank or all Banks from the selected    MIDI Port if numerical banks are supported by your MIDI  device       Select the type of MIDI Instrument  GM  MT32  GS  Yamaha    XG  Numeric or Custom  from the Instrument pull down menu       Use the radio buttons to activate or deactivate specific MIDI    channels for selected Instrument set and Drum set  The default  MIDI channel for drums is 10     Use the Drum pull down menu to select the type of MIDI Drum  set your device supports  GM  No Drums  Roland GS Drums   Yamaha XG Drums  Numeric or Custom        Push Custom to create a formatted text document for displaying    custom instrument names for your MIDI device  Edit to change       Save will save Custom patch names as a formatted text docu     ment   TXT   Save this file then open it in a word processing  application and enter your patch names  Then save as a text docu   ment     Load will allow you to load the Custom text file  Your custom  patch names will display throughout SmartScore   s MIDI patch  selection windows  Instrument Templates and Playback Con   sole         188    USING SmartScore    MIDI Editing and Sequencing  10 5 6 MIDI event selection  Under the Edit menu choosing Select opens the Select Window    
32.  ENF display  the key signature will be C  major  A minor  by default   To to change C major to a new key signature selected from  the palette  you must still toggle to Change mode and click  on or to the right of the clef sign  Simply inserting a new key  will not work     To create a custom time signature to Insert or Change     n  F   a  Select the Custom Time button from the    Signatures    palette       USING SmartScore 21 5    Reference    b  Using numeric scrollers  select a new numerator  beats per mea   sure  and a new denominator  note value receiving the beat      c  Click to insert signature immediately following any barline   To insert a new key or time signature in the body of a score     e With a time or key signature selected from the    Signatures    pal   ette  Insert mode  click to the right of any barline     To insert a new key or time signature at the end of a system     According to the conventions of music notation  a change of  key or a  change of time signature that begins on a new line should be indicated  at the end of the previous line        FIGURE 11   9  Time Signature at the end of a system    e Insert a barline about 1 2    to the left of the end of a system  Insert  the new time signature anywhere to the right of a barline    e Ifa barline    closes    the system  you may click to the right of the  last barline to insert a signature  It will appear outside and to the  right of the system     e A final option is to simply insert the change o
33.  New  will create a  brand new ENF document  leaving the original file  untouched     To the left  a new   empty Score Part  was Inserted  you  could also re link  parts to an existing  Score Part   Here   the new Score Part is  given a name  Win   Right click   Mac   Option   click to  open its Properties         To relink any struc   tural object  click on  the object and drag it  to another object in  an adjacent column        Here  the three exist   ing parts are relinked  to the newly created  Score Part  named  Conductor   s         New Conductor   s Score  Apply to New     FIGURE 8   7  Creating a Conductor   s Score    Highlight the unlinked Score Parts and push Remove  Push Apply to  New  The modified structure is transformed to a new ENF document     NOTE  Newly created documents will have the same name of the  source file plus    1        2    etc     8 4 3 Joining open ENF files    You may discover that you have edited two ENF files that really belong  together as a single section  movement or song  ENF files can be joined   appended  to a single ENF file        USING SmartScore 125    Changing Score Structure    To append two open ENF files into one     e Click to highlight two open ENF files  Click Join  Press Apply to  New  A new ENF file will be created from both selected files     8 4 4 Creating Part Scores from Ensemble Scores    Extracting instrumental parts out of a conductor   s score in Score Struc   ture is similar to creating a conductor   s score from
34.  Photoshop does not currently support CCITT Type 4  files     TIP  When you Save a file  SmartScore will continue to save to that  directory until you change it  The same is true when you Open  a file  Remember that SmartScore will look in one directory  when opening a file and may default in a different one when  saving a file  Once changed  the new path becomes the default     3 5 1 Recognition Options    Opin  Tima lawl   dan e Wome    E Tima Fsi Linking   M pka  iiia     PP Eriga r Pi inad ling  E Paik  F heg    A Hra g      _fape Hrag       FIGURE 3   9  Recognition   Options    The following section describes options you can choose for recogni   tion  When satisfied with your choices  push Begin Recognition        3 8 USING SmartScore    Scanning and Recognition    NOTE  If Recognition fails  refer to    Troubleshooting Guide    on    page 48   e Language    SmartScore OCR interprets unique characters belonging to individual  languages  To exclude the possibility of recognizing characters that do  not belong to the language of a piece  choose its appropriate language     e Text  Check this box if you wish to recognize lyrics and text in the music     TIP  If you are scanning in single line parts for the purpose of joining  them into a conductor   s score  it is recommended not to recog   nize text  Otherwise  text from every score part will be overlaid  on the pages of the conductor   s score     e Lyrics Under Last Staff of Systems    Check this box if you are recogniz
35.  Preview or the View  gt  True Scrolling function  See  page 231   View  gt  True Scrolling      To page forward or backward in an ENF document     e Use the paging buttons located in the Main Toolbar or push the     Next page         Previous page    arrows at the lower right hand  corner of the SmartScore window        USING SmartScore 77    Editing Notes and Rests    5 1 3 Status Bar    The status bar in the lower right corner of the SmartScore window con   tains information about the current page being viewed such as Part  Number  Page Number  Cursor Position  Page Size and Zoom View   Clicking inside any of these fields will open a control window  Go To   Part  Page  Cursor   Page Setup  Page Size  or Zoom Level  Zoom      5 1 4 Active staffline    In SmartScore  only one staff is capable of being edited at a time  A  staff becomes activated when the mouse pointer crosses into it  If Show  Active Staff is checked  all other staves display as greyed out  inac   tive      You may display the active staff highlighted or show all staves in black   To allow every staff to display in color or in black   e Go to the View menu and uncheck Show Active Staff     For additional information on navigating inside an ENF document  go  to   More ENF navigating    on page 129     5 2 Preliminary Cleanup    Many new symbols are recognized in SmartScore 3  In order to limit     false positives     we   ve added options that selectively narrow the set of  objects to be recognized   See    R
36.  Pula  oe   me   reye Fata were      O Where Cores Fins  C Kee       FIGURE 11   16  Auto Save  To change backup intervals for Auto Save   e Select Auto Save from the Options menu   The active  topmost ENF file will be saved as follows   e Every minutes   even if no editing takes place     e Every 7 actions   based on number of editing actions  e g  Insert   ing  Changing  Deleting  etc     e Whichever Comes First   based on which is first  the number of  minutes selected or the number of actions performed     e Never   deactivates Auto Save of the ENF file     11 6 12 Options  gt  Reset Tools and Palettes    Resets all toolbars and palettes to the default choices set at installation        236 USING SmartScore    Reference  11 6 13 Options  gt  Reset Tools and Palettes    Reactivates all warning windows that can be    permanently    disabled  by user  This applies to warning windows that have a    Do not show  this warning again     checkbox option  If selected again  warning win   dows will not appear again until program is reinstalled or until Rest  Warnings is selected again     11 7 ENF PLAYBACK Menu  11 7 1 Playback  gt  Set Playback Range  Refer to    Set Play Range    on page 71   11 7 2 Playback  gt  Play   Stop   Rewind  Used to control playback functions from menu   11 7 3 Playback  gt  Thru  Sets MIDI device to play    live    without MIDI Record on   11 7 4 Playback  gt  Console  Opens Playback Console  Ctrl 9   Cmnd 9    11 7 5 Playback  gt  Mini Console  Opens 
37.  Resolution  off  Manually set to value  acceptable to scanner   300 to 600 dpi            l bit image only    or     Cannot process grey  images        Scanner was set or forced  by scanner software to  scan in Grey  Color or  Photo     Re scan in SmartScore  interface with    Over   ride Grey      ON  Win            Recognition failed for  this page           Scanner set to screen res   olution of 50 100 dpi     Scan again accepting  Auto resolution settings  for best results     Manually set resolution to  350 dpi and scan again        Scanner was set or forced  by scanner software to  scan in Grey or Color           Re scan in SmartScore  interface with    Over   ride Grey      ON  Win           48    USING SmartScore       Scanning and Recognition       Table 3  Troubleshooting Guide       Problem    Probable Cause    Fix             Recognition failed for  this page      cont   d     Scanner was set or forced  by scanner software to  scan in Grey or Color     Rescan in Your Scan   ner   s interface  350 dpi    Black  amp  White  Text    Line Art         Music not fully scanned  or is severely skewed     Rescan making sure all  the music is selected   Scan music straight or use     Deskew    function        Image too large for  selected resolution     Re scan ensuring    Auto  Resolution    is ON        Scanner hangs or  crashes     Driver conflict     Ensure latest scanner  drivers are installed        Scan outside of Smart   Score using scanners soft   ware        Poor
38.  Scanner settings                         35  Choosing Your Scanner   s Interface  Manual                   36  Recognition Sequence                              37  Recognition Options                         38  Post Recognition                             41  Scanning Outside of SmartScore                         42  Selecting Pre scanned Files for Processing                     43  Scanning Part Scores  Score Parts                   45  Recognition Accuracy                             46  Troubleshooting Scanning and Recognition                   48  Image Editor                                50  Chapter 4  ENF Playback                       57  Getting Started                             57  Error Check                               61  Playback Console                               61  Working with Voices                            62  Altering Playback                               67  Repeats and Endings                          12  Instrument Templates                              73  Add drum tracks                             74  Karaoke View                            74  Chapter 5  Editing Notes and Rests                 77  Navigating Inside an ENF Document                     77  Preliminary Cleanup                          78  ENF Editing Modes                                79  General Note Editing                           80       USING SmartScore 2    Table of Contents    Undo                             80  Tool Palettes  F2 F9 keys                      
39.  See    Error Check    on page 83 for  details on this option     4 3 Playback Console    In the Playback Console  you can make changes to MIDI Instruments   tempo  transposition  muting  soloing and pan settings     To open the Playback Console     fie e Press the speaker button in the SmartScore Toolbar  Or hold  g down Ctrl   9  Win    Cmnd   9  Mac  or select Playback  gt   Console        FIGURE 4   6  Playback Console    The first column  Track  lists the MIDI track assigned  The second col   umn  Ch V lists the MIDI channel number within a colored box repre   senting one of 4 possible voices  black  red  green and blue      The Playback Console will display just tracks  parts in black only   when Options  gt  Color Mode   Part  If Options  gt  Color Mode    Voice is selected  all voices  in colored boxes  will be displayed  Refer  to    Working with Voices and Colors    on page 149 for more informa   tion on controlling voices        USING SmartScore 61    ENF Playback    e Play button plays the current ENF file  Once playback has begun   the Play button changes to Pause   e Pause suspends playback  Play resumes where pause was  selected   e Stop button stops playback of the ENF file   e Rewind button resets playback to the start of the playback range     EEE E    4 3 1 Adjustable Playback Console settings   e Scroll to any beat in the score using the Measure   Beat slider    e Adjust the overall or individual volumes of playback with the  Volume sliders       Use the P
40.  See FIGURE 4   9  on  page 65  Prior to recognition  you will have the option of varying the  distance that SmartScore uses to determine whether to join these offset  notes to one vertical event or not  See    Join Offset Voices    on page 40   for more details        64 USING SmartScore    ENF Playback    TIFF    Window I Ar  ENF  Window 4 Joined Voices        Vertically Aligned     FIGURE 4   9  Vertical Alignment    TIP  In Edit Shapes environment  vertically joined events are  cd    glued    and will move together when nudged  To verify  whether or not offset voices are actually joined to the same ver   tical event  press the Edit Shapes button in the Main Toolbar  and nudge one of the notes horizontally  For more info  see      Edit Shapes    on page 87     4 4 4 Correcting Vertical Alignment    The best way to test if offset voices are not vertically aligned is to  examine them in MIDI view  Push the MIDI button in the Navigator   Select Overview or Piano Roll  Unless there are changes in time signa   MIDI tures  all measures should have the same number of beats  marked by   vertical lines within measures   Tiling ENF MIDI views may alos help        You may also listen to the playback  uncheck Lock to Time Signature  first   If you find offset notes that should  but don   t play together  you  can join offset voices manually or they can be joined with a global     Join Voices    command     To vertically align offset voices  manual method      a  Use the Select tool   
41.  System Manager    Use the System Manager to add or delete parts  change part names   PANO  GUITAR apply visibility to parts and voices  extract parts and voices  assign  MIDI instrument sounds to parts and voices and to control staff and  system spacing  The System Manager displays information about what  is found in the active system  the highlighted system   A special display  called the Super System which is a sort of    mother system    is also  accessible   See    Active System vs  Super System    on page 117 for  more details   Changes made can be applied to the current system  cur   rent and following systems  active Score Part or to the entire score        FIGURE 9   8  System Manager    To open the System Manager   l a  Position the mouse pointer over a given system in the ENF view   TIP  To verify an active system  go to View  gt  Show Active Staff        USING SmartScore 143    Detailed ENF Editing    b  Press  Ctrl M   Cmnd M  or select Edit  gt  System Manager    from menu  All parameters of the active system will be displayed  including part name  visibility  instrument and staffline  staff and  system spacing     Parts run vertically along the left column along with checkmarks that  identify whether they    exist    in the active system  Voices run horizon   tally     9 6 1 Part Names    Part Names in System Manager are directly linked to instrument  Names in Instrument Templates  When a Part Name is selected in the  System Manager  all playback parameters are
42.  TWAIN compatible  This is  true for both Mac OS 8 9 and OS X    As of this publication   only a handful of OS X scanners have successfully imple   mented TWAIN  Tests performed at Musitek on many    Mac  OS X    scanners indicate that currently  only the newer lines  of HP   and Epson   OS X scanners are fully TWAIN compat   ible  See    Selecting a scanner    below and    Selecting the  SmartScore Scanning Interface    on page 33 for details     3 4 1 Scanner drivers for Mac    Make sure you have installed the scanner drivers that came with your  scanner  Often it is necessary to select    Custom Installation    and then  choose    TWAIN    and or    Plug ins    to install these specialized drivers        32 USING SmartScore    Scanning and Recognition  3 4 2 Selecting a scanner    a  Go to File  gt  Scan Music  gt  Select Scanner  If your scanner   s  icon is visible  click it     NOTE  Ifyou have installed all available scanner driver software and  you still do not see a scanner driver listed  it will be necessary  to scan outside of SmartScore  In that case  turn to    Scanning  Outside of SmartScore    on page 42  If your scanner works   disregard the Plug ins option below     b  Test scanner by pushing the Scan button in the Navigator or by  choosing File  gt  Scan Music  gt  Acquire     e Plug ins    If your scanner does not include a TWAIN driver or if it does not  respond properly  try operating your scanner with a Plug in instead     a  To quickly test your scanner
43.  a  measure by its harmonic direction and possibly its timbre  Contrapuntal  voices reside in the same measure of the same staff  Voices are often  distinguished by stem direction and sometimes by offsetting the hori   zontal position of notes  For the purposes of SmartScore  a    voice     written in its own staffline is referred to as a    Part        Score Part   Scores that are printed in sets for each individual instru   ment  Players read from their own unique set of pages  For example  a  duet for guitar and flute would be printed in two separate sets  one for  the flute player and one for the guitar  Staves of part scores flow like a  book where each staff line appends to the one above it     Ensemble   Scores that have multiple staff lines connected by a verti   cal bar or    bracket     usually along the left hand edge of the music    When joined in this way  each staff line represents a different part or  instrument  All parts are played    ensemble     Piano music   with left   hand and right hand staves  are joined into one system  is regarded as     ensemble     SmartScore assigns each stave to separate MIDI tracks     Landscape   Some scores are wider than they are high  These    land   scape    layouts need to be rotated prior to processing        USING SmartScore 251    Glossary       Folio   Large sized and conductor scores may need to be scaled down  during scanning or reduced on a copy machine before scanning  If the  score must be reduced more than 50  in
44.  a drum accompaniment or  you can add customized patterns to the drum library yourself     7 2 1 Play back with automatic drum pattern  To select an instant drum pattern for ENF playback     a  With any ENF file open  click on the Drum Pattern button in the  SmartScore toolbar        108 USING SmartScore    Working with Drums    b  Sort any column by clicking on its name in the column header        FIGURE 7   3  Automatic Drum Pattern Library    c  Click on a pattern that matches the time signature and style of  your ENF file  Enter a starting measure in the from measure no   window  Push the Insert button     d  To insert another drum pattern  select it from the pattern library   set a starting measure and press Insert       Use the Insert Silents button to enter measures without drums     rh o    To change a start or ending measure  highlight an inserted pattern  and use the Begin or End scrollers to reset start or end measures       Press OK to accept the selection      a ga      Press the spacebar to hear your file playback with a drum track     7 2 2 Adding custom drum patterns from ENF    The drum pattern library is expandable  You can add new patterns that  you have either created yourself or imported from a MIDI file which  contains a drum track on MIDI Channel 10     To add an ENF drum pattern to the automatic drum pattern library     a  Open an ENF file which contains a percussion part  written with  a percussion clef  or     b  Open an ENF file in which you have cr
45.  abiiy       FIGURE 4   13  Setting Default Tempo    e Change of tempo    Creating a change of tempo is accomplished by inserting tempo mark   ing or a metronome mark from the    Tempo    palette anywhere you wish  the tempo to change  See    Tempo Markings  Metronome Mark     on  page 156  You may also alter playback tempo continuously with the use  of the ENF Tempo graphical controller  See    ENF Tempo Controller     on page 69        68 USING SmartScore    ENF Playback  4 5 3 Graphical controllers    With the Velocity graphical controller you can vary note velocities of  each note cluster quickly and smoothly  With the Tempo controller   you can    draw in    tempo variations smoothly over time  Controllers  can be accessed either in the ENF Text and Controllers toolbar or  below the Piano Roll window in MIDI view     TLE O a   A   FIGURE 4   14  ENF Text and Controllers Toolbar    4 5 4 ENF Velocity Controller    sy In ENF score view  push the    V    button to activate Velocity controller     Click and drag your mouse up or down along the vertical bars which  represent each note   s velocity  The higher the bar  the more the veloc     ity        an i ie ak AK ertt   ta    FIGURE 4   15  ENF Velocity Controller  4 5 5 ENF Tempo Controller     z  Push the    T    button to active tempo controller  The horizontal line in     the topmost staff represents default tempo  To vary tempo  click and   drag your mouse up or down  The last tempo point will be fixed until  changed  
46.  aff ep fo     aE e FARA e TO  aB eo EIRA ere e a eho a aa    FIGURE 9   12  Playback Console       The Playback Console controls tempo  transposition  muting  soloing   volume  panning and MIDI Instrument assignments to parts  when  Options  gt  Color Mode   Part  or to voices  when Options  gt  Color  Mode   Voice      To open the Playback Console     e Select the speaker button from the SmartScore Toolbar  Or hold  down Ctrl 9  Win    Cmnd 9  Mac  or select Console from  Playback menu     The first column  Track  lists the MIDI track assigned  The second col   umn  Ch V lists the MIDI channel number within a colored box repre   senting one of 4 possible voices  black  red  green and blue   When  Options  gt  Color Mode   Part only tracks will be displayed  If  Options  gt  Color Mode   Voice is selected  all tracks and all voices  will be displayed     TIP  When Color Mode   Voice  each voiceline becomes assigned  to a discrete MIDI channel  That is why you may see many  channels within one MIDI track  To reduce the number of chan   nels to equal the number of stafflines found in ENF  change  Options  gt  Color Mode to Part        If changes are made to MIDI instrument assignments the System  Manager will become updated  Changes to other parameters will  be stored as MIDI data for the ENF file     The default MIDI instrument sets are General MIDI Instruments and  General MIDI Drums        154 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing  To reassign MIDI instrument sets   a  P
47.  and Quick Tour    d  In Measure 18  Quick select  Ctrl   click  the natural sign in the  right hand piano part  Move your cursor up to the flute part and  click on the half note B to insert the natural     e  Right click  Win    Ctrl   click  Mac  on any open tool palette   Click on Articulations and select Trill     tr      Click on the quarter  note at the end of Measure 19 to insert the trill     Using the Properties Tools and Selecting Playback Range    a  Select the Properties Tool button from the SmartScore toolbar   Click onto the trill you just inserted  A properties window will  open that allows you to change playback properties of the trill   Move the    Permutations    slider to 8 and select    Fixed Number of  Durations        NOTE  The Properties Tool works for most articulation  dynamic  and tempo markings  See    Properties Tool    on page 162 for  more information on how to edit these object   s properties     b  Go to Playback menu and select Select Play Range  Change the  beginning measure to 19  Select OK  In the Mini console  press  the Rewind button then Play to hear the changes you just made     Visualizing contrapuntal voices    Voice color mode will display contrapuntal voices in different colors   This allows you to view secondary voices  both notes and rests  in red  and tertiary voices in green    a  In the SmartScore Toolbar  push the    Voice Visibility    button     b  Notice in each staff how notes and rests appear as either black or  red  This
48.  and properly cropped for  each page previewed     3 5 Recognition Sequence  Win   Mac     Choose Scan Next Page or Save As and Begin Recognition to initiate  the recognition process  Choose Open Pages in Image Editor to view  scanned pages and to make alterations such as cropping  deskew  line  drawing  cutting and pasting  etc  Choose Cancel to stop     Scan Pied ape    Opes Pages i bmgge Eriks        Seed well Bags Placer      Can         FIGURE 3   8  Scan Next Page   Finish window    NOTE  If you select Open Pages in Image Editor  turn to    Image  Editor    on page 50 to learn about editing scanned images        USING SmartScore 37    Scanning and Recognition    To save your scanned image file and begin recognition sequence   a  Push the Save As and Begin Recognition button     b  Browse to a location for saving your SmartScore working files   You may wish to add a unique directory at this time     c  Give the image file a name  If you are using Windows  the exten   sion     TIF    will be added automatically     d  Push OK to begin the recognition process     The image file you have just saved contains all pages you scanned  The  default filetype is    Compressed TIFF     CCITT Type 4   a multi page   single file TIFF compression format  This type of TIFF file is approxi   mately 10 times smaller than an uncompressed TIFF image file     NOTE  If you are going to open the scanned image in Adobe Photo   shop  you may want to save in the larger  uncompressed TIFF  format 
49.  and select Unify Key and Time based on First  System  Hit OK  Now you need only fill in the missing notes   Remember to use Copy and Paste functions whenever possible        USING SmartScore 119    Changing Score Structure       8 2 Page Setup    Any or all the actions listed in this chapter will alter the layout of the  ENF file  Be mindful that synchronization with the original scanned  pages will probably be lost after one or more of these actions are  applied  Therefore  it is recommended you thoroughly edit the ENF file  using the associated image views before altering score structure  See     View  gt Associate Image Files    on page 232 for information on reasso   ciating ENF and scanned image views     Controlling individual page layout can be done in Page Setup   To change page layout of single pages  parts or entire scores     a  Select File  gt  Page Setup   Page Setup    Margins Page Layout    Tee ih   inches Page Width       3 inches         Page Height     Sj inches    Type of Page     Left    Right  Legal  8 5x14in  v    0 5 E      3 a Orientation     inches     inches Portrait h    First System Indent     Do not change v      Scope    Score x  Bottom   0 0   inches Cancel    FIGURE 8   1  Page Setup       b  To set page size to correspond to a particular page format  choose  the desired format from the    Type of Page    pull down menu     c  Click and drag with your mouse or use the numeric scrollers to  change existing margins as required     d  To reorient
50.  associ   ated with the active system  Larger systems may require scrolling  down the list  The program will not allow you to select more or  less parts than actually appear in the active system     c  To view adjacent systems  press Next or Prev System     d  In the Apply To box  press Apply to apply to active system  Sys   tem  will apply to the active system plus all subsequent systems     NOTE  Revise part names in System Manager or Instrument Tem   plates        122 USING SmartScore    Changing Score Structure    Pave  2 of Orchestral Secs    FIGURE 8   4  Re linking an orchestral score       In this example  the first  page consists of one sys   tem having 15 parts  15  staves per system   With  the cursor positioned over  the system and Re link  Parts opened  15 parts  will be checked     The second page contains  3 systems each with 6  staves  Many parts that  appeared on the first page  have dropped out  With  the cursor positioned over  one of the systems  15  Part Names will be listed  but only 6 will be checked  in the Re link Parts win   dow  In this case  it was  necessary to remove all  check marks and then  check the top six parts to  reestablish proper part  linking  See Figure 7 2 on  page 122a   Notice that  the re linked parts were  applied to all subsequent  systems  System   from  the topmost active sys   tem        USING SmartScore    123    Changing Score Structure  8 4 Score Structure    8 4 1 Structure and hierarchy    Score Structure  Edit  gt  Scor
51.  b  In the New MIDI View window  New Track is selected  Press  OK    c  A MIDI Record view will open  Test drum sounds by hitting the  center keys on the two front rows of your computer keyboard    d  When ready  hit the Record button  You will hear a metronome  sound for one measure  Playback and drum recording begins     e  Hit Stop when finished  Close the MIDI window to return to  ENF        USING SmartScore 111    Working with Drums  7 3 2 Defining Virtual Drum Kit  To change a MIDI drum and link to your computer keyboard     a  Select Options  gt  Virtual Drum Kit Definition    rs  ue Hep    panikas   Eu   ae   a   pal ash       FIGURE 7   5  Virtual Drum Kit Definition  b  Click on an instrument   key in Instrument list     c  To reassign a MIDI drum instrument  push Change Instrument  and make another MIDI drum selection in the pull down menu     d  To reassign a keyboard key for that instrument  push Change  Key and press any keyboard key to be linked to that instrument     e  When finished  press OK   To add a MIDI drum and link it to your computer keyboard     Push Add     Press a key to become associated with the sound     Select a new drum sound from the pull down menu     When finished  press OK     a ao o       112 USING SmartScore    Working with Drums          USING SmartScore    113    Controlling Structure from the System Manager                   115    Page Setup                                120  Re link Parts                                 121  Mergin
52.  by 125      e Trill    With   r  trill  selected  click on a notehead to insert a single trill mark   ing  To create an    extended    trill  toggle the    C    key to enter Change  mode  Click and drag horizontally to select a region  The length of the    extension is determined by how far you drag the mouse   fr    E    Trill  Insert mode  Extended Trill  Change mode        FIGURE 11   2  Trill and Extended Trill  e Sharp  Flat and Natural    With one of these modifiers selected  clicking on a trill marking will  cause playback of the trill to    flatten        sharpen    or    neutralize    certain  pitches within the context of the active key signature  The modifier also  appears above the trill marking when inserted     e Mordent  Click on notehead to apply a mordent  Mordents play back as follows     m  2         FIGURE 11   3  Mordent       212 USING SmartScore       Reference     Inverted Mordent    Inverted mordent play back as follows     FIGURE 11   4  Inverted Mordent  e Tremolo  single  double  triple  quadruple     Tremolos repeat the note affected by dividing the associated note by  four times the selected tremolo value     i   S    FIGURE 11   5  Tremolo  Double   e Arpeggio    Arpeggiated chords will offset the start time of all members of a cluster  and will keep them sustained throughout the duration of the chord     1 I r  EE Be    Written Played  FIGURE 11   6  Arpeggio    e Glissando    Glissandos divide connecting notes into equal notes of 1 4 base val
53.  click and drag the mouse to highlight the range of  notes over which you wish to apply the dynamic change        FIGURE 9   17  Inserting a crescendo marking    c  Dragging downward while selecting the range of notes will insert  the marking above the staffline  Dragging upward will insert the  marking below the staffline     NOTE  Playback properties of articulations and dynamics may be  changed using the Properties tool  See    Properties Tool    on  page 162     To delete a dynamic or tempo marking     e Press the    X    key and click on the marking  An alternative to  using the X key is to use the Select tool     O    key   highlight the  mark and hit Delete     9 11 3 Articulations and Trills    Articulations affect the playback of selected notes  These include slurs   turns  fermatas  mordents  trills  accents and tremolos  For a complete  description of each articulation   s playback function  turn to  Articula   tions   Section 11 2 2  on page 211     To insert a legato  slur      a  Push the Legato button in the    Articulations    palette        F    A   i  I     a  Jd    b  Drag to select range of notes to be associated with the legato   Dragging downward places the legato above notes  Dragging  upward positions legato under the notes     To insert turns  fermatas  accents and mordents     Turns  fermatas  accents and mordents can be positioned near the top of  a note head or near the tip of note stem     a  Select the articulation        USING SmartScore 159    
54.  derived from Instrument  Templates  See    Instrument Templates    on page 147 for additional  information     To select a Part Name     a  Highlight a part by clicking on the black dot next to its name   Choose a desired instrument in Part Name column  Notice that  MIDI instruments for each voice become updated     b  If you wish to add a new part name with a unique MIDI instru   ment assignment  select    Add New Part    from the top of the  pull down list  This will open Instrument Templates and allow  you to add a new template  name it and assign any MIDI instru   ment to it     9 6 2 Assigning MIDI Instruments to Voices    Voices inherit MIDI instrument assignments from Instrument Tem   plates initially  You can change MIDI instrument assignment for voices   in Voice mode  or parts  Part mode  in the System Manager or Play   back Console     TIP  Assigning each voice a different MIDI instrument adds richer  sound texture and helps in hearing    inner voicings    of the  music  Highly recommended for classes in composition     NOTE  Playback Console and System Manager are linked  Changes  made to MIDI instruments in one environment will update  the other  MIDI instrument assignments in Instrument Tem        144 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing    plates are not changed automatically  They can only be  changed manually     To change MIDI instruments for voices in System Manager     e In System Manager  click on any voice of any part and select a  new MIDI instrume
55.  down while holding the Shift button  down and then clicking and dragging any lyric block     Push    L    again  Text and Controllers toolbar  to exit Lyric Edit     6 2 1 Dashes  spaces and underscores    Dashes  spaces and underscores are special characters used to separate  lyric blocks  Typing any of these characters will move the cursor to the  next block  The Backspace key deletes dashes  spaces and underscores     In the following example  the block    der     was missed in recognition   The cursor was positioned at the end of the previous block  A dash was  entered to create a new    syllabic    block and the correct text was then  entered     g Fm        wonde Hf     FIGURE 6   2  Editing Lyrics       USING SmartScore 95    Editing Text and Symbols    Dash   Moves the cursor to next lyric block and inserts a dash   Normally used to connect multiple syllables within a single word   Space   Moves the cursor to the next lyric block  Normally used  to separate words  Does not insert a dash or an underline   Underline   Normally used as a    melisma     an underline indi   cates that one vocal sound should be extended over two or more  beats  Inserting creates an underline up to the next block  Enter   ing multiple underlines will string them together over several  lyric blocks    Backspace   Deletes characters inside a lyric block  Also deletes  hyphens when backspacing from one lyric block to the next   Carriage Return   Creates a new lyric line and positions cursor  i
56.  dura   tion     To change the velocity  loudness Mote attack  of selected note event s      e Drag the top and bottom edges of a note adjust the note   s veloc   ity                 Changing note velocity Changing note pitch    FIGURE 10   16  Editing MIDI note velocities and pitches  To change the pitch or position of selected note event s      e Click and drag the center of the note to change pitch  vertical  drag  or note placement  horizontal drag      NOTE  The arrow keys on your computer keyboard can also be used  to adjust the pitch and start time of the selected note     NOTE  To realign MIDI events to the nearest starting point  quantiza   tion   go to Options  gt  Snap to and select the base rhythmic  value     To delete selected note event s      e Hit the Delete key to remove any highlighted notes        1 90 USING SmartScore    MIDI Editing and Sequencing  To change the velocity and or the duration of selected note s      a  Select the Velocity Duration option from the Edit menu  The  Velocity and Duration window will open        Velocity and Duration x          o Sa Oo    p E J          FIGURE 10   17  Velocity and Duration window    b  Use the sliders or type in numbers to increase or decrease the  velocity or duration of the selected note s  by a percentage   Example  You wish to double the duration of a group of selected  notes  In the Velocity Duration window move the Duration slider  to 200      c  Press OK   10 5 8 Note Event window    Double clicking on 
57.  final repeat or ending   Segnos are usually positioned early on in the piece  after a repeat     To mark a final repeat with Segno     a  Select Segno from the    Barlines and Repeats    palette     b  Insert the Segno by clicking the barline that begins the last  repeated ending or section     c  To stop a final repeat or ending  return to the Segno and continue  on to the Coda  select d s  al Coda  meaning    from the sign to the  Coda         To have a final repeat or ending return to the beginning of the piece  and terminate at the Segno sign     e Select d c  al Segno  meaning    from the beginning up to the  sign     and insert it by clicking on the barline in the last ending or  repeat where playback is to return  The repeated section will       USING SmartScore 167    Detailed ENF Editing  return to the beginning of the score and play through to the  Segno   NOTE  To Coda  Segno  d s  al Coda  D S   D C  and d s  al Fine  signs are all ignored until an ending or repeat is played once   9 14 5 Working with the da Capo  D C    dal Segno  D S    and  Fine signs  D C   da capo  means    from the beginning    or    return to the begin   ning      To have playback return to the beginning of the piece and play through  to the end   e Select the D C  button from the    Barlines and Repeats    palette   D S   dal Segno  means    from the sign    or    return to the sign        To have a final repeat or ending return to the Segno and play through to  the end     a  Select the 
58.  folder     PIANO ab c  This will return you to the Begin Recognition window  Turn off    Triplets  Endings and Text Recognition  Press Begin Recogni   tion  SmartScore will begin to recognize the sample file  When  Recognition is complete  the name FANDANGO will appear in  the Save As filename window with SmartScore   s own filetype  listed as ENF  Extended Notation Format   The ENF extension  will automatically be added to all filenames after recognition   Click on Save     2 2 1 System Report    This window will indicate to you how many systems were recognized  as well as the number of parts found in the largest and smallest systems   See    Post Recognition    on page 41 for more details  Press OK after  studying the report     2 2 2 Unify Key and Time    The Unify function unifies all key and time signatures based on choices  listed in the dialog box  See See    Unify Key  Time and Clefs  U     on  page 169 for more details        Hit OK        1 0 USING SmartScore    Installation and Quick Tour  2 3 Editing an ENF File    2 3 1 Macintosh   Windows shortcut conventions    Most SmartScore keyboard shortcuts are identical on both Windows  and Mac machines  These include    Ctrl   Click    or    Ctrl   key    Click     Occasionally  however  an entirely different command is  required  specifically the familiar Windows Right Mouse Click  Since  most Macs do not have a right mouse button  the Windows right click  function is performed on the Mac version of SmartScore with    
59.  gt  Save  Ctrl  S  Cmnd S  to update the current  ENF file        218 USING SmartScore    Reference  11 3 6 File  gt  Scan Music  e Acquire  Initiates scanning  Same as Scan in Navigator   e Select Scanner  Opens list of available TWAIN drivers to select     e Choose Interface  Windows only     gt  SmartScore   s   selects the SmartScore scanning interface  Refer  to    Scanning in Windows       on page 25 for details    gt  Your Scanner   s   selects the image scanning software included  with your scanner     11 3 7 File  gt  Import    SmartScore imports standard NIFF files  Notation Interchange File  Format  which conform to the NIFF 6b Specification  NIFF is an open  standard for the exchange of music notation files between music nota   tion programs  The NIFF standard supports both graphical and time   based data  Unlike MIDI files  which are only time based  NIFF  attempts to logically integrate both page layout and playback informa   tion        USING SmartScore 219    Reference    11 3 8 File  gt  Page Setup       Page Setup allows for several adjustments of how your music will  appear on screen and on the printed page  Since SmartScore is WYSI   WYG  What you see is what you get   your pages will print just as they  appear on screen  albeit sharper provided you have a high resolution  printer     Page Setup    Margins Page Layout  ee 1   inches Page Width     3 6 3 inches       Page Height   3 inches    Type of Page     Left  Right  Legal  8 5 x 14 in   X    0 5     
60.  move a selected group of notes upwards or downwards in pitch     a  Use the Select tool  O  to select an entire region for cleanup  Edit   gt  Select All  Ctrl   A  will select everything on the current page     b  Hit the    G    key  Only articulations will be deleted  All other  notation objects remain unaffected     9 3 3 Dots  D     Hit the    D    key  This toggles between Insert a dot and Delete a dot  modes  Notice how the cursor alternates between a solid insert dot and  grayed out delete dot     Any note or rest may be selected with dots of prolongation assigned to  it  Select a note or rest from the appropriate palette  then click on the  single or double dot button inside the palette  In Insert mode  the new  note rest will have a dot  In Change mode  a clicked note rest will  acquire a dot        134 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing  9 3 4 Ties  V     Hit the    V    key  This toggles you between the solid Insert tie and  grayed out Delete tie modes  To tie two contiguous notes of the same  pitch  click on the first note  The    V    tie tool will also insert multiple  ties from one chord cluster to the next as long as note pitches match     NOTE  To over ride default arc direction  insert ties with a right click   option   click for Mac   Inserted ties will have reversed arc  directions     To insert only one tie at a time  select the    single tie    button from the     Notes    palette     9 3 5 Beam direction  A     With any single flagged note chose
61.  notes    To create beam groups  first select a flagged note value and the    right  beam    option from the    Notes    palette  Toggle the    C    key to enter  Insert mode  Multiple clicks inside a staff will form beamed groups of  two notes  Deleting an end beam note will cause adjacent beamed  groups to connect  To join multiple 2 beam groups into larger groups   use the Select tool     O    key  and then hit the    B    key  All selected  beam groups will reform     e Inserting an    inside    beamed note    To insert an inside beamed note  be sure you are in the Insert mode   Select the proper note value from the    Notes    palette and then push the     Middle Beam    button  Position the cursor inside a beam and click     e Forming flagged notes into beamed notes    To transform a group of flagged notes into a beamed group  use the  Select tool     O    key  to highlight any group of flagged notes adjacent  to each other  Hit the    B    key to join the notes into a beamed group     e Forming a beamed group from mixed flagged and beamed  notes    Any number of flagged or beamed notes may be reformed into a new  multiple group by first selecting a group of adjacent flagged or beamed  notes using the Select tool  Then hitting the    B    key     e Quick beam  Using any    Beam    tool  you can quickly insert and edit a series of  beamed groups   e With any beam tool selected  clicking from left to right  will cre   ate 2 note beamed sets     e With    middle    or    r
62.  of the triplet in Measure  3 to change its value  Repeat with the last note of each triplet     To edit chord clusters   A note is missing from the chord in the treble clef of Measure 9     a  Press the    Z    key to activate the Cluster Tool  The Cluster Tool is  used to build chords or remove single noteheads from a chord   b  To insert the new note  click where the D belongs below the F   NOTE  To delete one notehead from any chord  first hit    Z     the clus     R j ter tool   then    X     the delete mode   Clicking on any note   head will remove it without deleting the entire note cluster     Mlle          USING SmartScore 1 3       Installation and Quick Tour    Select tool  Copy and Paste   Quick Delete     c  Hit the    O    key to activate the Select tool  Drag to highlight the  beamed grace notes you entered in Measure 1 earlier  When only  the two notes are highlighted  hold down Ctrl   C to copy  Edit   gt  Copy is the same      d  Now  hold down Ctrl   V  Edit  gt  Paste   Position the mouse  pointer to left of the first note in Measure 23 and click to insert  the copied grace notes  Holding the Shift button down  move the  first grace note from D to E     e  Quick Select  Ctrl   Click  the flagged eighth note from the last  note in Measure 22  Push the Grace Note button in the    Notes     palette and click to insert the grace note in Measure 24     f  Go to Measure 23  Quick Select the sharp to the left of the C   notehead and then click on the grace note i
63.  or    Move Down     buttons  They may be removed from the list separately or all  together with    Remove    or    Remove All    buttons     d  Insert an unused writable CD  CD R  into your CD tray  Burn  Method   Auto  Change to another method if you have trouble     e  Push    Burn Last Track and Finalize CD    to record and finalize  your ENF files to CD  All selected files will record on a single  CD track  To record individual tracks  use    Burn New Track    as  described below     NOTE     Finalizing    a CD is necessary before a can be played back   Once Finalize is applied  you will not be able to record any   thing more to the CD     f  If you wish to continue burning new selections without finalizing  the CD  push    Burn new track     Each set of converted files in  the    Files to Burn    list will record to one track  Select    Burn  Last Track and Finalize CD    to record last track and finalize  the CD     11 4 ENF EDIT Menu  11 4 1 Undo  Ctrl  Z   Cmnd Z     Reverses the last action you performed  SmartScore has ninety nine  layers of Undo     11 4 2 Redo  Ctrl  Y  Cmnd Y   Reapplies the last action that has most recently been Undone   11 4 3 Edit  gt  Cut  Ctrl X   Cmnd X     To Cut selected objects from the score and place them on the clipboard     a  Hit    O    key or choose the Select tool from the Toolbar        b  Click and drag a box with the cursor   c  Press Ctrl   X  Cmnd   X or select Edit  gt  Cut from the menu        USING SmartScore 223    Ref
64.  order to fit the imaging area of  your scanner  you may consider scanning each full sized page twice  and treat each scan as one    image page           12 2 Score Components    System   A grouping of multiple staves linked together by a solid line  or bracket along the left margin is called a    system     All staves belong   ing to a system are played simultaneously  In ensemble scores  each  system appends to the one before it  A single page of a symphony con   ductor s score  containing 10 or 20 staff lines per system  may represent  only a few seconds of music     Staff  Stave    The field on which notes are represented is called a  staff     Staves    is normally used as the plural  At the core of every staff  are five horizontal lines  Each successive line and space are equivalent  to a full step in note pitch  The higher the note appears on the stave  the  higher its pitch  Every staff line anomaly begins with a clef sign and a  key signature     Voiceline   An individual melodic line formed by a voice within one  measure  When a staff contains more than one voiceline in any given  measure  note stems of each voiceline usually point in the opposite  directions  The sum of all note and rest values of each voiceline in any  given measure should be accounted for  but sometimes are not  Refer to     Working with Voices and Colors    on page 149 for more on dealing  with this rule in SmartScore     Clef   The clef sign at the beginning of each stave identifies which  pitc
65.  p   i ing the Quantization value  e g  to 1 8th notes      e Divide By Beats  When ON  resulting ENF file will interpret    measure lengths by number of beats and insert change of time  signatures if beats of each measure do not correspond to the  default time signature  Turn OFF to lock default time signature   Smooth Voices  When ON  contrapuntal voices will be inter   preted as continuous lines whenever practical  When OFF  con   trapuntal voice will be interpreted loosely     9 17 Troubleshooting ENF Problems    Table 6  Troubleshooting ENF Problems                   Problem Probable Cause Fix   Notes and symbols Font association lost  Reinstall Chopin04 font    appear as large letters  Font is located in the  main SmartScore direc   tory       MMS YSTEMO008 MIDI Out port is not Close any other MIDI   Device is in use     available to SmartScore applications other than   due to another open SmartScore        MIDI application                 172    USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing    Table 6  Troubleshooting ENF Problems       Problem    Probable Cause    Fix          Can   t delete an object     Display pixel trapping  may not coincide with tip  of cursor     Use Select tool     O    key   to click on or drag around  an object  Hit Delete        How do I create a new  ENF page     SmartScore creates new  pages by    rolling over     added systems     Position cursor inside the  last system of a page  Go  to EDIT  gt  SYSTEMS  gt   ADD BELOW  A new  page will be c
66.  positions  This will  transpose only key signatures  leaving notes unchanged    good for  mental games  but not much more     e Change Pitch    This transposes notes without changing the key signature  Select the  number of half steps to move selected notes  harmonic pitch shift    Pitches are moved by a uniform interval while considering the key sig   nature  Change Pitch can be used in conjunction with Transpose Limits     TIP  To shift the pitch of a small range of notes  it is easier to use the  a Select tool  O   Click drag to highlight the range of notes   Then  while holding the Shift key down  drag the selected notes   up or down     9 5 2 Limit Transposition    You may limit transposition to a part or voice or to a selected range  within the ENF score     To limit transposition by part  voice or range     a  Click on the Limit tab at the top of the Transposition window      Frapar  Tae Lint    Pet oie Fane  Ba Pets   F Dom Bie Fraa    Paya  Sd S T       FIGURE 9   7  Limit Transposition       142 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing    b  Choose All Parts  or select individual parts by name to trans   pose  If you select a single part  you may also limit the scope of  transposition to a single voiceline  In the Part Voice box  select  the voice to transpose     c  To limit transposition by range  choose Selected Area  range  must already be highlighted by the Select tool  or by Measure  number     d  Click OK to transpose with selected limits applied     m M 9 6
67.  recognition results     Missing barlines due to  light obscuring right  margin or to right margin  having been cut off dur   ing scanning     Open image file in Image  Editor  Use Select Tool to  delete obscured regions  and the Line Draw tool to  restore right hand bar   lines           Image too small for  selected resolution     Scan again accepting  Auto resolution settings  for best results        Handwritten or non stan   dard notation  Poor print     Scan well printed  stan   dard sized sheet music        Poorly printed music     Increase Darkness level   Find better original           Image not straight   skewed         Open file in Image Editor   File  gt  Open  gt  Image    Use Deskew tool to  straighten each page           USING SmartScore    49       al    falio    Scanning and Recognition    Table 3  Troubleshooting Guide             Problem Probable Cause Fix  Poor recognition results    Image was dithered by See    Dithered Images    on   contd  scanner software  page 28 for information                 3 10 Image Editor  e Begin Recognition or Open in Image Editor    Following the final scan of music pages  you may choose to    Begin  Recognition    or    Open Image Editor     This choice will stop the Recog   nition process and open the scanned images in the Image Editor     NOTE  The image will not be saved until File  gt  Save As is selected   e Load an image file  To open an image file you have previously scanned     a  Press the Open button on the Navigat
68.  represents the two voices in each staff line     c  To see how multiple voice colors are represented in MIDI  reopen  the Playback Console  Ctrl   9   Cmnd   9         1 6 USING SmartScore       Installation and Quick Tour    Notice that Track 2  PianoR in System Manager  has two voices   Black   Voice 1   Red   Voice 2         FIGURE 2   5  Playback Console with Options gt  Color Mode  gt  Voice selected  2 3 6 Changing Instrument sounds in Playback Console    The left and right hand piano parts have been automatically recognized  as piano and assigned the General MIDI patch of Grand Piano  By  default  the solo part was automatically assigned the Flute patch  Let   s  say you want to hear the solo part as a clarinet sound instead     a  Push the speaker button to open the Playback Console or use the  keyboard shortcut  Ctrl   9   Cmnd   9         FIGURE 2   6  Changing instruments in Playback Console   b  In Track 1  click on Flute in the Instrument column and scroll up   2 instruments and select Clarinet  Push the spacebar or Play but    ton to hear the solo part played as clarinet  Move volume slider   left or right to increase or decrease volume on one or more parts    Reset Track 1 to Flute or some other instrument  Close Playback  Console        USING SmartScore 17    Installation and Quick Tour    2 4 Working with the System Manager    ONG M The System Manager is a very powerful editing tool  It controls part  OOK and voice visibility  part name and template assignme
69.  score     To change default pitch to MIDI drum mapping  a  Select Playback  gt  Drum Set        x    Peng eee Fig cars oe n ee eee hed od    FIGURE 7   1  Linking stafflines to MIDI drums in Drumset map    b  Using the mouse  drag links from staff and ledger lines and  spaces in the window and reconnect to list of General MIDI       USING SmartScore 107    Working with Drums    drums on left hand and right hand sides of window  Press OK to  finalize changes   7 1 2 Creating a drum pattern in ENF    a  From the Navigator palette  select    Score     In the System Type  in Score pull down menu  select Solo Part  Click OK     b  Right click  Ctrl   click for Mac  on any open palette and select  Clefs  Click on the rectangular    percussion clef        c  Toggle the    C    key to get to the Change mode and click on the  treble clef in the first staff line  All clefs should then update     d  Select eighth note from    Notes    palette and using beam direction  tools  create the following pattern  Hit Spacebar to play back     d   120       FIGURE 7   2  Creating a drum pattern    NOTE  Simultaneous drum sounds must be contained in the same  voice  Therefore  you will need to use the Cluster tool to add  additional drum    note heads    to an existing note stem  Hold   ing down Shift and dragging a notehead up or down will  allow you to hear each drum sound associated with each  space and line     7 2 Automatic Drum Patterns    It   s more fun if it   s got a beat  Simply select
70.  score parts  just  reversed  NOTE  All SmartScore files  ENF documents  must contain  at least one Score Part linked to at least one Part     a  Open an ENF file with 2 or more staves per system     b  Select Edit  gt  Score Structure     Here is a typical     ensemble    score  ENF  Document  which will  contain one Score Part  with several Parts linked                   Ensemble score having 4 parts to it               n Three new Score Parts     Epi Documents   Som fma Patz    TEETE el Insert  To name  Right   ef  et  click  option   click for       mo Mac  in Properties   Drag each Part  child  to  Inserting New Score Parts new Score Parts  par   ent  to reconfigure each  SE open ENF document     Push Apply to New to  spawn off a new docu   ment with included    Naming and re inking data  This will create a  Parts to New Score Parts file with 4 Score Parts  arranged in order  Play     back remains synchro   nized and the original  ENF document remains  unchanged     ETE          FIGURE 8   8  Creating Score Parts from Ensemble scores       126 USING SmartScore       Changing Score Structure    The following table describes how various structures appear in ENF  and MIDI views  Understand these relationships and you will under   stand how the logical structures are linked in SmartScore     Table 4  Relationship between structures in ENF and MIDI views                                  Score  Document  Score Part Part Voice  ENF View  Defined by Super Defined by Defined by P
71.  scores from scratch    By selecting one of 15 templates  you can create musical scores from  scratch  Drop in one key and time signature  press a button and the  entire score is updated  Need more space between staves  Change one  setting and apply to the current system  subsequent systems  page  part  or entire score  For easy score editing  refer to the Quick Key card     1 1 5 Sequence and record    View and edit the MIDI data of your scanned music in the familiar  Overview  Piano Roll and Event List format  Record your MIDI perfor   mance either as an accompaniment to your scanned music or in layered  tracks and transform it into musical notation  Record drum tracks from  your computer keyboard while listening to the playback using Virtual  Drums     1 2 So  what do you want to do   e Scan and play back sheet music     Scan  gt  Recognize  gt  Playback  gt  Karaoke  e Transpose    Edit  gt  Transpose  gt  Print  e Create score from scratch     Choose Template  gt  Assign Instruments       2 USING SmartScore    Introduction to SmartScore  e Create score from MIDI keyboard     Choose real time or step time  e Create score from imported MIDI or NIFF files     Choose Import MIDI or NIFF  e How would you like to output your score     Print ENF   Export to MIDI   Export to Finale     Export to  Sibelius     Export to PDF   Export to NIFF   Record to CD    1 3 What   s new with Version 3     1 3 1 Even greater recognition accuracy and realism    State of the art recognition met
72.  select for playback 63  instruments   selecting for playback 17  Invert Image 26  37       260 USING SmartScore    INDEX    J  Join Voices 65    K  Key Signature 253  key signature  change 215  at end of line 216  unifying 169  key transposition 87  139    L  Landscape 251  Lock to Time Signature 58  67  Lyrics 94  aligning 235  recognizing 39  when found under last staff 39    M  Mac OS X MIDI Setup 59  Macintosh   Windows shortcut  conventions 11  map  Quick Keys 174  Measure 253  Measure Numbers 234  melisma 235  merging  ENF files 125  systems 121  metronome markings 156  MIDI  closing MIDI views 180  Cut Copy and Paste 192  display controls 201  Event List 197  event selection 189  Graphical Controllers 185    importing files 170  inserting note events 198  Instrument settings 187  measure settings 193  metronome 202  note characteristics 190  Note Event 191  patch 186  255  playback 182  playback range 184  Program Change 186  recording 202  new tracks 204  Refresh 177  repeats and endings 195  select by time frame 189  shuttle tool 186  snap to 204  242  Step Time Recording 206  switching tracks 186  Track Overview 180  velocity and duration 191  Zoom 181  MIDI Devices 58  183  MIDI Event 255  MIDI Files  burn to CD 222  opening from ENF document  179  233  MIDI instruments  assigning 144  MIDI Menu Items 239  MIDI Refresh 61  178  MIDI to ENF 170  miniatures  scanning 29  35  Mini Console 57  modes  color 149       USING SmartScore    261    INDEX    insert and chang
73.  the  recognizer attempts to identify italicized f and p marks  dynamic mark   ings   If so  these characters are classified as dynamics and their values  are applied to MIDI playback  See    Dynamics    on page 71 for infor   mation about dynamics     Push the    T    or    L    button to enter and exit Text or Lyric modes   While in either mode  it is not possible to do other sorts of edits     TL ao Ma  Ese E 4    FIGURE 6   1  Text and Lyric icons    6 1 Text    Characters outside of stafflines are treated as    dumb    text blocks  They  are differentiated from lyrics by color  Text is black  Lyrics are blue     NOTE  Score headers are not considered    text     See    Edit  gt  Score  Header    on page 227 for creating and editing the header line     To edit a text field     a  Push the    T    button in the Text and Controllers toolbar  Toggle  the    C    and select Edit mode  vertical cursor   Click anywhere  inside an existing ENF text block to edit text     b  The cursor will flash within the highlighted field  Use the Left  Arrow or Right Arrow buttons on your keyboard to navigate  within a text field     c  Drag to highlight one or more characters within the field to  replace with newly typed characters or to delete  Delete key    Highlighted characters can also be cut  copied or pasted else   where using standard Ctrl  X        C    and    V    shortcuts  Cmnd       X        C    and    V    for Mac         USING SmartScore 93    Editing Text and Symbols    To m
74.  the MIDI Thru sound  If no  Piano Roll is open  MIDI Channel 1 is used     10 9 2 Metronome    The Metronome is on by default  The metronome is useful in keeping  time while recording and as a    count in    tool to mark the beginning of  the recording session     Sometimes  you may want to record    freely       that is  you simply want  to capture a performance in MIDI without worrying about timing or  about trying to convert the performance into notation  For this purpose   you will want to turn the metronome off  To make the metronome inac        202 USING SmartScore    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    tive during recording  uncheck Metronome from the Realtime menu  OR choose the Metronome Settings listed under the Options menu  and uncheck Metronome On     To make changes to SmartScore   s metronome     e Choose Metronome Settings from the Options menu  The Met   ronome Settings window will open     i Ta oe TT  ace HE  Wiin FF ian I  pall  bid Pri BD Desa Laat rea  fo Ej fii g poo    Powe Dam  Fia ou  fh  Eran Ha E  f Ti    re TILL     e   g       FIGURE 10   25  Metronome Settings    NOTE  The Metronome On check box must be selected for the met   ronome to sound during recording  To record without a met   ronome uncheck the Metronome On box     With Synchro On  SmartScore will synchronize the start of recording  with the first played MIDI event     Select which MIDI Port the metronome will play through   Choose the metronome   s MIDI Channel     NOTE  The de facto drum c
75.  the Playback Console See     Tempo    on page 68 for more details     To insert a tempo marking or change of tempo  metronome  mark     a  Select a preset tempo marking in the    Tempo    palette or select a  custom tempo by pushing the Metronome Mark button at the  bottom of the palette        1 5 6 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing    b  If using a metronome mark  select a new tempo and baseline note    value  Preset tempo markings ranges from 30 bpm  Lento  to 240  bpm  Prestissimo                                   am m m w m i    mes fr aLa a  O    Dave iene Jats    Tal   PP fo e    jasraisisnfariisasiinbinisinti    FIGURE 9   14  Tempo Change  Metronome Mark  window    c  In Insert mode  click anywhere above the topmost staff of a sys   tem to insert mark  Tempo will adjust accordingly at that point     To edit a metronome or change of tempo mark in the score       h a  Select the Properties tool from the SmartScore toolbar   b  Click on a mark in the score to edit its properties     lespe Marking P rapier lisi    E Agita tengo cating in al jerga eget iha pa     Aby hiii terapi i fice a baa File     Rasa Deisi     Lik  a      FIGURE 9   15  Tempo Marking Properties window    sanassa  aag fi    f       c  Using the horizontal slider  select a new tempo for the mark   Choose whether to apply the change to just the single mark  all  similar marks or permanently apply the change for that mark     9 11 2 Dynamics  Hairpins  Crescendos and Decrescendos  To Insert a Dyn
76.  the page  select Landscape or Portrait in    Orienta   tion       e  To change the indent of the first system on the first page  select  0     1     2    or 3    from the First System Indent pull down menu        1 20 USING SmartScore    Changing Score Structure    f  In the Scope pull down menu  select the range of pages you wish  to apply the change to   The entire Score  Score Part or only to the current Page     g  Push OK to apply the changes     8 3 Re link Parts  8 3 1 Merging Systems    For parts to be joined into a system  and play simultaneously   an  adjoining bracket along the left hand margin must be visible  Usually   brackets are cut off by mistake during scanning If this occurs and one  or more parts become separated  becoming single line systems them   selves   it is possible to rejoin them  forming a new  larger system     To merge two systems into one larger system     a  Position your cursor over the first broken system   staff line  Hit  Ctrl L   Cmnd L  Mac  to open the Re link Parts window     Hina id cette     pail  i asii iis d       FIGURE 8   2  Merging Systems    b  The active system highlights in grey  Using the checkboxes  reas   sign each highlighted staff to its correct part name and position in  what will become the final  reformed system  Apply to   System     c  Press the Next System button and reassign each highlighted staff  line to its correct part name as you did above  Return to the first  staff of the final  reformed system by selecti
77.  to see in the con   verted ENF file     NOTE  Itis unusual to have more than 2 voices in most music   Density    e Measures per System determines the number of evenly spaced  measures per system  Automatic is recommended    e Systems per Page determines the number of evenly spaced sys   tems per page  Automatic is recommended     Quantization    SmartScore can quantize the MIDI file that will be converted  Each  note event will    snap to    the nearest beat boundary eliminating fluctua   tions in the timing of a MIDI performance     Be forewarned  however  that MIDI files created with    free tempo      rubato  will probably have many irregular note divisions and odd   looking timing as SmartScore attempts to    compartmentalize    notes     off the beat        e Check None to prevent the application of quantization        USING SmartScore 171    Detailed ENF Editing       e Use Note On  Note Off to determine the smallest rhythmic val     ues used to when spelling note start times  Note On  and end  times  Note Off  in the ENF document     Use Note On  Note Duration to determine the smallest rhythmic  values used to when spelling note start times  Note On  and the  minimum length of each note  Note Duration  in the ENF docu   ment     e Shorten each note to the last Note Duration value   e Lengthen each note to the next Note Duration value  e Justify each note to the nearest Note Duration value     e  If the resulting ENF file has many stand alone flagged notes  try reduc  
78.  unifying 169  signatures 215  Slur 211  slur  editing 85  159  playback 211  SmartScore scanning interface 26  soft accent  playback 212  solo violin tutorial 22  spacing  line  staff and system 119  split measures 67  Split screen Viewing 129  staccato  editing 160  playback 211  staff  active 230  adding a part 118  when not recognized 119  Staff  Stave  252  stem direction  changing 85  135    selected note 15  Step Time Recording 206  Super System 117  apply changes to 146  System 252  system  active 117  apply changes to 146  collapsing and expanding 225  fix distances and number 225  indent first 120  insert above below remove  225  226  merging 121  relink parts in 122  System Manager 5  18  143  256  Active vs  Super 117  Controlling system 147  part extraction 115  Part Names 144  Super System 117  Visibility 145  visibility 115  voice extraction 116  System Report 41  System   apply changes to 146    T   tempo   change mark  metronome  156   change properties 157   properties 164   set default 227   setting default 68  Tempo Controller   ENF 69   MIDI 185  Tempo slider 194       264 USING SmartScore    tenuto  editing 160  playback 212  Text  deleting 94  editing 93  moving 94  This 230  Ties 86  254  ties 15  tiling views 139  185  Time Signature 253  time signature  change 215  at end of line 216  unifying 169  Tool palettes 211  changing 12  palette modes 81  131  resetting 80  Toolbars 229  open at startup 230  transposed instruments 73  148  Transposition 87  
79.  when they are assigned  to different instrument sounds     2 7 2 Open MIDI View       In the Navigator  push the MIDI button  This will open the MIDI  environment for the guitar score       With view Type of Overview selected  push OK  Overview dis     plays all ENF staff lines represented as MIDI tracks     Push MIDI button in the Navigator again  This time the option of  opening Piano Roll appears  Push OK  The score is now dis   played in a    piano roll    configuration where note lengths appear  as long bars  Notice that contrapuntal voices maintain their color     2 7 3  Viewing all open windows using Tile          Click on the    Tile Windows    button in the Main Toolbar to view  all windows that are open in SmartScore       Using your mouse  click and drag on the margins of each window    to resize them as you wish     Clicking into any window activates it  You may zoom  edit and  scroll as you would if it were the only open window     Viewing both the ENF and MIDI windows simultaneously  allows you to visualize both sides of the SmartScore equation   The graphical environment and the time based environment   Whenever you have a playback problem that doesn   t appear to  be resolved in ENF view  open MIDI piano roll view  tile the  views and compare data  Often you will visualize the problem  in MIDI  e g  Incorrect note or rest values may cause MIDI to  create more beats than what is written in the ENF view        USING SmartScore 23    Scanning Music              
80.  will add the contents of the clipboard to  the selected area without erasing the existing notes     e Replace existing events will replace the existing music with the  contents of the clipboard        1 92 USING SmartScore    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    e Move to make room will push the existing music backward and  then insert the contents of the clipboard    e Use Repetitions to determine the number of times the contents of  the clipboard will be inserted    e Start from time designates where the inserted music will begin  by choosing the measure  beat  and tick    e Select Start from track to paste to a selected track number    e All to track will insert the contents of the clipboard  no matter  how many tracks were originally selected  into one track     py Z P  Using Tile  you can view ENF and MIDI View windows simul   p  4 taneously  Changes made in ENF automatically update the  MIDI view  This is useful if timing problems are encountered  while editing ENF notation    E       FIGURE 10   20  ENF   MIDI Tile View  with floating Zoom window   10 5 10 Measure Settings    The Measure Settings window allows for inserting changes of tempo   time signature and key signature at the start of any given measure        USING SmartScore 193    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    To open the Measure Settings window in Overview or Piano Roll view     e Double click on the measure number where you wish to insert a  change in key  time  or tempo    Hrann Senmi E   w a  ae   Tret  i    ft
81.  with your mouse  The cropping rectangle  should not intersect or interfere with any part of the music  There is no  need to extend the length of the rectangle beyond your area of interest   SmartScore will automatically center each page of music to the  selected default page size  After the preview scan is completed on each  page  check that the image in the preview window is straight and prop   erly cropped     e Auto Deskew    After an image is previewed  toggle this button on and off and choose  the setting that gives you the straightest possible image  If you are  unable to make the image appear straight in the Preview window  auto  deskew failed  Reposition your music in the scanner and preview again     e Override Grey    SmartScore   s scanning interface uses standard TWAIN commands to  control scanner settings such as resolution and color selection  Some  scanners use    image intelligence    that automatically select scanner set   tings  Many of these scanners    think    printed music is a photograph  and create a grey image which is then    dithered    to black and white  If  recognition fails or results are extremely poor  zoom If the image  appears as small speckles  salt and pepper  rather than solid black  then  the image has been dithered  In this case  re scan with the Override  Grey option checked in the SmartScore interface        28 USING SmartScore    Scanning and Recognition    i ematia jerene inane  Ai a Ne wt age    frag   T eet e     FIGURE 3   5  Im
82. 1 Nudging notes and rests in Edit Shapes  To nudge text  note and rest objects horizontally in Edit Shapes     a  Place your cursor over any notehead  rest or text field     b  Click and drag until the object is positioned where you want it   Notice that text fields can move in any direction     NOTE  Horizontal reformatting of an entire score is not currently  possible  Objects fixed inside a staff must remain in that staff     To move groups of objects horizontally     a  Push the Edit Shapes button in the Text and Controllers toolbar  to exit Edit Shapes mode  Use the Select Tool to highlight a  range of objects including notes  rests  guitar fret and chord sym   bols     b  Push Edit Shapes button again and using your mouse  drag high   lighted objects left or right     NOTE  Beam angles and stem length may become    normalized      return to default angle and length  when selected and moved     NOTE  Objects are constrained to the measure in which they reside   6 4 2 Repositioning lyrics in Edit Shapes    Occasionally  lyrics are jammed together either because the default font  is too large or the original music was not well punctuated        98 USING SmartScore    coc  om  o   JEGA    ido GUITAR    Editing Text and Symbols    a  In Edit Shapes  click and drag on the notehead associated with  the lyric block that in a crowded area  Move the note left or right  to reposition  Notice that the lyric block will move with the note  when moved horizontally           FIGURE 6  
83. 139  tremelo 160  playback 213  trill  editing 160  extended 160  playback 212  Up or Down 238  trills and mordents 159  triplets 39  85  change bracket type 235  implied 39  nested 86  True Scrolling 231  Tuplet 254    INDEX    user defined 86  turn   editing 159   playback 211    U  Undo 13  80  Unify key  time and clefs 169    V  Velocity 255  Velocity Controller  ENF 69  MIDI 185  vertical alignment 64  correcting 65  verifying 65  99  vertical event 40  97  View  gt  Color  gt  By Voice 63  views  tiling 139  violin  solo 22  Visibility 115  Parts 115  Voices 116  Voice 251  voice color 16  63  override automatic 82  switching 149  Voiceline 62  252  voiceline  color 150  threading 20  256  visibility 145  visiting another staff 152  230  voices  assigning instruments to 63   144  187  color modes 149       USING SmartScore    265    INDEX    extracting 116  145  in Score Structure 127  offset 40  64   swap position 66  polyphonic 20  splitting 151  using hidden rests 155  vertically aligning 65    W  What   s new  3  window synchronization 120    Z  Zoom  ENF 77  MIDI 181  Piano Roll 181  Window view 129       266 USING SmartScore    
84. 50 for more details        USING SmartScore 41    Scanning and Recognition    The last window to open is to Unify key and time signatures  Selecting  Yes will unify all key and time signatures based on what was recog   nized in the topmost part of the first system  The default is No  Select     No    if the piece is an orchestral score with transposed instruments   See    Unify Key  Time and Clefs  U     on page a for details      tity after pecognition       Dove sst ip liv Vie ai hep andl ines hirea tapes  on the krei fal lew of pach opie       Yen   C He    T De cheer hi   m san    oF   Cance  FIGURE 3   11  Unify Key and Time After Recognition    NOTE  Both System Report and Unify Key and Time can be per   manently disabled by selecting    Don   t show this window  again        e  Refer to page 57 for information on ENF playback  or to page 80  for information on editing of the ENF file     When recognition is complete  the screen will split between an image  pane and the ENF pane which displays a representation of what was  recognized  As you scroll down and page  the image and ENF panes  remain synchronized  An alternative to the    split screen    view is the     Zoom Window    view  See    Split screen and Zoom Window Viewing     on page 129    3 6 Scanning Outside of SmartScore    An alternative to operating your scanner from inside SmartScore using  TWAIN or a Mac plug in is to scan in another application  You can use  your scanner   s software or a third party imag
85. 60 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing  b  Click on the head of the note to apply the tremolo value   To insert an arpeggio     a  Select the arpeggio button  squiggly line  from the palette     b  Click and drag the mouse to select a chord cluster  can include  more than one voice      c  Dragging the mouse in an upward direction will cause the notes  to arpeggiate in an upward scale     d  Dragging the mouse in the downward direction will cause the  notes to arpeggiate in a downward scale  A down arrow is added     To insert a glissando   a  Select the glissando button  two notes with line  from the palette     b  Clicking on any single  non chord cluster  note will insert a glis   sando to the following note belonging to the same voice  During  play back  the glissando will be heard     To delete any articulation     e Select the specific articulation to delete from the    Articulations     palette  Press the    X    key  and click on the object itself or on the  note associated with the articulation     NOTE  To delete any articulation that is not note specific  use the  Select tool     O    key  to highlight it and hit the Delete key   9 11 4 Inserting or Deleting Multiple Articulations  Any articulation can be applied to multiple notes at one time   To assign an articulation to many notes at once   a  Use the Select tool        O    key  then drag to select a range of notes     b  Select the articulation to be applied to all highlighted notes and  insert it to any 
86. 81  Grace Notes                             81  Select tool     O    key                          81  Voice color                           82  Error Check                              83  Pitch shift                              83  Editing beamed notes                             84  Stem direction                             85  Dots of Prolongation                          85  Tuplets and Slurs  Legatos                         85  Ties                                86  Barlines                               87  Edit Shapes                             87  Key and Clef Transposition                          87  Creating a New ENF Score from Scratch                 88  Saving and Exporting an ENF File                        90  Saving ENF files as MIDI or other file types                   91  Chapter 6  Editing Text and Symbols                   93  Text                                93  Lyrics                               94  Text and Lyrics  Changing Styles and Entering                     96  Edit Shapes                             97  Guitar Frets and Chord Symbols                           99  Creating and changing chord symbols in the GCL             101  Bracketing                               103  Chapter 7  Working with Drums                   107  Percussion clef  Clefs Palette                          107  Automatic Drum Patterns                          108  Virtual Drum Kit                               111       3 USING SmartScore    Table of Contents    C
87. 84  Velocity and Tempo Graphical Controllers                   185  Switching between tracks                         186  Sh  ttle TOG  Som Sey eee eee eee ee et kee E 186  Inserting program changes  Assign MIDI instrument         186  MIDI Instrument settings                        187  MIDI event selection                          189  Changing MIDI event characteristics                  190  Note Event window                      191  Cut Copy and Paste                      192  Measure Settings                            193  Setting Repeats and Multiple Endings                         195  Segnos                       a eee 195       5 USING SmartScore    Table of Contents    Event List    S225 26 S 2 SoS SSO S eS S oe Peet S 197  Changing parameters of selected notes                       198  Inserting note events                       198  Editing Key  Time and Tempo                199  Inserting Non Note Events                   199   Playback Console                             200   Display Controls                          201   MIDI Recording                          202   Step Time Recording                            206   Virtual Drum   it       ee Se See oe es 207   Playback Considerations after MIDI Editing                     208   MIDI tO ENF  2 5502 2  a acs e Se ele cont ee Steep ere Se 208   Saving MIDI Files                         208   Chapter 11   Reference                             211   Properties Tool                             211   Tool Pale
88. 9   22  Trill  Properties       e Fixed duration  Preset permutations based on SmartScore 2 0    e Variable duration  Move the slider to the a number which well  represent the fraction of the note value to be trilled  1 to 1 32     e Fixed number of divisions  Move the slider to increase or  decrease the number of permutations  The more permutations are  generated  the shorter the duration of the trills   1 to 32 permuta   tions         164 USING SmartScore       Detailed ENF Editing    9 12 7 Tempo  Metronome  and Rhythmic Group Properties    e When either a Tempo or Rhythmic group marking is clicked with  the Properties Tool  their basic edit windows will open     9 13 Fermata  Accent  Staccato and Tenuto Properties    These articulations are associated with a single note itself  To open the  properties control window for each these marks  click on the note to  which the mark is associated  As with all other properties  changed val   ues may be applied to one or all similar markings in the ENF file and  can be stored permanently for future ENF files     9 13 1 Fermata Properties Slider  e Increases or decreases the tempo for the duration of the note     9 13 2 Accent Properties Slider  e Increases or decreases the velocity of the note     9 13 3 Staccato Properties Slider  e Shortens the duration of the note     9 13 4 Tenuto Properties Slider  e Lengthens the duration of the note     9 14 Repeats and Multiple Endings    Many of these markings are recognized automatically  
89. A MPU MIDI OUT  OPL3 SA Soft Wave Table Ml  Roland Serial MIDI Out Port A    FIGURE 10   7  Options  gt  MIDI Devices    b  Click on the MIDI Input device   interface you will use for  MIDI recording new MIDI data     D    o    c  Click on the MIDI Output device you wish to use for MIDI  ido au playback  The MIDI device window will display all installed  MIDI device drivers  MIDI Mapper is the default in Windows  and is most commonly used for sound cards although a specific  soundcard driver may be selected from the Output list     d  Press OK to set the selected MIDI devices as the current Smart   Score MIDI sources  The selected device then moves to the top of  the list     NOTE  Ifthe desired device is not listed in the MIDI Devices window  make sure the device driver has been properly installed   Check any software that was installed with your MIDI device  and or download MIDI driver from manufacturer   s website        USING SmartScore 183    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    When installing a new MIDI driver  reboot to initialize the  new driver     Mac Only     Rerun OMS Setup after installing new MIDI drivers  For more about  OMS  turn to    OMS Setup  Mac Classic Only     on page 60    10 4 4 Playback Range  To specify part of the score for playback     a  Select Set Play Range from the Realtime menu   fey PANDI Pitas  Banig El  C Play Enga    po Fd fo dajen        Final F heop  E eee    FIGURE 10   8  Set MIDI Play Range       b  Set the first measure and last measure 
90. Cmnd   X   Mac    Cut region will be stored in the clipboard   s memory     e Copy    To Copy an area without removing it from the image  use the Select  tool and drag a box with the mouse  Select Edit  gt  Copy  Ctrl   C   Win    Cmnd   C  Mac    Copied area will be stored in the clipboard     e Paste    To Paste the contents of the clipboard into an image file  select Edit  gt   Paste  Ctrl   V   Cmnd   V  Mac    The cut or copied section will  drop into the image  With the mouse  drag the fragment anywhere  within the image and release the left mouse button  To fix the fragment  in place  click outside the pasted fragment     e Transparent Background    To Cut or Copy the marked off area of an image file with a transparent  background  highlight Selection Mode from the Edit menu and select  Transparent     NOTE  After modifying pages in the Image Editor  remember to Save  the modified image file        USING SmartScore 55    Getting Started                              57    Error Check                         e eee 61  Playback Console                            61  Working with Voices                            62  Altering Playback                          67  Repeats and Endings                           12  Instrument Templates                              73  Add drum tracks     ars eas eee Ss Sree Be Sree Be ee 74  Karaok   View  ans  ced erst Seah eee ee  ae eae et a e 74       56 USING SmartScore    No MIDI  Recording    Chapter 4 ENF Playback    4 1 Getting Start
91. Cmnd N     Select between a new ENF or a new MIDI  Choosing New ENF will  open the New SmartScore Document window  Select a Template or use  Custom to create a unique score  Choosing New MIDI will open a  blank MIDI Overview and Piano Roll for MIDI input     11 3 2 File  gt  Open  Ctrl  O Win   Cmnd 0O     Opens File Selection dialog box and lists saved files  A selected file  will be loaded into memory and will display on the screen     11 3 3 File  gt  Close  Cmnd W     Closes active ENF document  If changes have been made  a Save As  dialog box will open     11 3 4 File  gt  Save  Ctrl  S   Cmnd S for Mac     This will save an open SmartScore document to the same drive the file  was opened from  The original name remains unchanged  If ENF and  Image are displayed  only the ENF file is saved     11 3 5 File  gt  Save As    You can save files in several file formats other than SmartScore   s  native ENF format  These include MIDI   MID   NIFF   NIF for Lime  and  NIF for Sibelius  and   FIN  file  Saving in the  FIN format will  create a file that can be opened in Finale 2000c or greater with page  layout and formatting intact  To save open ENF document into one of  these formats or to save open file with a new name     a  Go to File  gt  Save As   b  In the Filetype Format window  choose a format to save the file   c  Browse to another directory and change the name if necessary   d  Press OK  The file will be saved in the last directory used to     save      NOTE  Use File 
92. D S  button from the    Barlines and Repeats    palette   b  Click on the desired barline to insert the D S  sign     Fine means ending  It is usually placed in the middle of a repeated end   ing and terminates the song     To have the last repeat stop  return to the Segno and continue on to the    end of the piece     a  Insert a Fine sign by clicking on the barline that marks the final  end point    b  Select d s  al Fine  meaning    from the sign to the end     from the     Barlines and Repeats    palette     c  Insert either the d s  al Coda or d s  al Fine mark by clicking the  barline where the last repeat is to begin     To have the final repeat or ending return to the beginning and play  through to the Fine     e Place the Fine sign at the appropriate barline  Select and insert  d c  al Fine in a measure following the Fine sign        168 USING SmartScore    pa    Detailed ENF Editing    9 15 Unify Key  Time and Clefs  U     Unify updates key and time signatures as well as clef signs throughout  the score based on choices made in the dialog window     e Hit the    U    key  press the Unify button on the Navigator  or  select the Unify Signatures button in the SmartScore Toolbar or  go to Edit menu and select Unify Signatures    e Check the Insert Empty Rests box to Insert a whole rest into all  empty measures     NOTE  Changing a clef sign does not reposition notes  Note pitches  alone are updated by a change in clef  To alter note position  by selecting a different c
93. Detailed ENF Editing       b  Click on a note head to insert the articulation above the note  head     c  Click on a note stem to insert the articulation at the tip of the  stem     To delete a turn  fermata  accent or mordent     e Select the articulation to delete  Press the    X    key  and click on  the notehead or stem of the associated note     To insert a staccato  tenuto or accent     a  Select the articulation   b  Click on a note head to insert the articulation above the note  head     To insert a trill     e With tr  trill  selected  click on a notehead to insert a single trill    e To create an    extended    trill  toggle the    C    key to enter Change  mode  Click and drag horizontally to select a region  The length  of the extension is determined by how far you drag the mouse     To insert an extended trill     a  As described above in To insert a trill  insert a trill on the first  note of an extended trill sequence     b  Hit the    C    key to enter Change mode  With the right mouse but   ton down  alt key down for Mac   right drag a box extending  from the trill along the length you wish extended trills to play     Trills can play back either up from the source note or downwards from  the source note     To choose whether a trill plays up or plays down    a  Go to Playback menu and from the item  Trills  select either Up  or Down     To insert a tremolo     a  Select one of four tremolo values from the palette  single  double   triple or quadruple        1
94. FIGURE 6   3  Changing Text and Lyric styles    The Font window is where the current font name  style  size and color  are displayed  Choose an alternative font  style  size or color  OK will  apply the change and exit the    Font    window  OK in    Styles    will  close that window  Selected fields will then be updated     6 4 Edit Shapes    Edit Shapes is an extremely useful tool that allows you to make a num   ber of graphical  non musical  changes to the ENF view  Modify beam  angles  change the shape of slurs  tuplets and ties  move one or more  objects horizontally as well as verify joining of vertically aligned  voices and note to lyric links     To alter the shape of arcs and beams     a  Push the Edit Shapes button in the Text and Controllers toolbar                                            FIGURE 6   4  Edit Shapes       USING SmartScore 97    Editing Text and Symbols    b  Position the cursor over one of the black outlined squares  hold  down and drag  These    handles    alter the height and or angle of  an associated beam  They also alter the endpoint of slurs    partic   ularly handy in a tight area where beams and slurs may intersect  other objects     c  Position the cursor over one of the brown outlined squares  Mov   ing these    control points    alters the angle of half of a slur or tie   making the arc lessor or greater  The    balance    of an arc depends  on the relative length and angle of each control    arm    attached to  either endpoint     6 4 
95. How they are  interpreted during playback is described below     9 14 1 Repeats and repeat symbols  To insert a repeat barline  a repeat measure or any other repeat symbol     e Toggle the    C    key to enter Insert mode  Select any repeat or  symbol from    Barlines  amp  Repeats    palette and click to place the  symbol     To change any current barline to a repeat barline     e Toggle the    C    key to enter Change mode  Click on any existing  barline to change it to the selected repeat barline        USING SmartScore 1 65    Detailed ENF Editing    To delete a repeat barline   e Hit the    X    key and click on the symbol to delete it    To insert a    Repeat Previous Measure    mark   a  Select the Repeat Previous Measure mark from palette   b  In Insert mode  click into an empty measure     All notation present in the previous measure will automatically repeat  itself during playback     9 14 2 Multiple Endings  To create a multiple ending     a  Select the Start Alternate Repetition button from the    Barlines   amp  Repeats    palette  Toggle the    C    key to enter the Change  mode     b  Click on the barline that begins the first ending  Select the num   ber of times you want the section to repeat  The barline will  change into a start of ending bar  The cursor then switches to an  end of ending barline with a left repeat bar as default  Click on  the barline that terminates the first ending        FIGURE 9   23  Multiple Endings    c  This    closes out    the f
96. IME Menu  11 14 1 Realtime  gt  Set Playback Range  Opens Set MIDI Play Range dialog window   11 14 2 Realtime  gt  Play  Pause    Spacebar       Begins  pauses  resumes playback of current MIDI file  In Record  Mode will start and pause MIDI recording     11 14 3 Realtime  gt  Stop  Stops playback or recording of current MIDI file   11 14 4 Realtime  gt  Rewind          comma   Rewinds to beginning of Set Playback Range   11 14 5 Realtime  gt  Solo  not in Overview   Solos the active track during playback   11 14 6 Realtime  gt  Record  Check to activate MIDI Record mode  11 14 7 Realtime  gt  External Timer  Set recording to begin from an external signal   11 14 8 Realtime  gt  Synchro Start    Active only in Record Mode  check to synchronize start of MIDI  recording with first note played on MIDI keyboard     11 14 9 Realtime  gt  Thru  Allows MIDI input to sound       244 USING SmartScore    Reference  11 14 10 Realtime  gt  Metronome  Activates  deactivates Metronome in recording  11 14 11 Realtime  gt  Playback Console  Ctrl   9   Cmnd 9   Opens the Playback Console     11 15 MIDI WINDOW Menu  11 15 1 Window  gt  New Window    Opens a second copy of the current MIDI view     11 15 2 Window  gt  Cascade    Layers all open windows within main SmartScore window  Active win   dow is stacked on top     11 15 3 Window  gt  Tile    Arranges all open windows to fit within main SmartScore window   Windows are arranged from left to right  top to bottom starting with the  active w
97. L  To create a new guitar fret   chord symbol   a  Select Guitar Chord Library from the Edit menu   b  Push the Add button in the Library section of the chord window     c  Choose a root with sharp or flat  bass tone  with sharp or flat  and  descriptive modifier  tonality  extension and augmentation      d  Press the Frets tab in the upper part of the window        a      FIGURE 6   8  Frets tab window of Guitar Chord library                      e Right click  Option   click for Mac  on any finger marker  inside the fretboard to remove it    e Clear All  grid  removes all current finger markers in fretboard    e String Marker  dot  places a finger marker on any string  between frets on the fretboard  Clicking above the fretboard nut   thick line  places an open string symbol  open dot  at any string  position    e Barre Marker  arc  places a barre marker above the fretboard  by dragging above the nut  When dragged across strings inside  the fretboard  the barre marker is positioned between frets    e Mute string marker  x  places an X above any string position to  indicate a muted string  When clicked above the nut  any finger  marker of that string is deleted        USING SmartScore 101    Editing Text and Symbols    e For banjo  ukulele  bass or other non six string fretted instrument  or for chords that require more range than 4 frets  choose the con   figuration you wish from Strings x Frets combo box        To show fingerings in other than Ist position  choose from Pos
98. Linking  Ctrl L or Cmnd L    Collapsing and expanding systems     A lot of music contains parts that do not play for long periods of time   Many printed scores    collapse    or    optimize    systems to show only  actively playing parts  Similarly  instruments that appear in one part  may split into two or more parts anywhere in the score causing systems  to    expand    in size  SmartScore automatically senses expanding sys   tems when  for example  a piano solo introduction precedes a vocal   piano arrangement  Expanding and collapsing parts are easily linked or  re linked in a simple to use environment called Part Linking  Part  Linking is also used when merging staves with brackets that were cut  off  Turn to    Re link Parts    on page 121 for details on this feature     11 4 11 Edit  gt  Score Structure    This special environment is used to perform useful functions such as  creating a conductor   s score from different parts and for isolating or  joining parts and voices  For detailed discussion on using this powerful  feature  turn to    Score Structure    on page 124     11 4 12 Edit  gt  Arrange Systems    You may select a fixed distance between systems and you can select a  fixed number of systems that will appear on each ENF page  In Edit  gt   Arrange Systems  you can select the distance between systems  in pix   els  that will be applied to all systems  You can also select a number of  systems you wish to appear on all ENF pages     11 4 13 Edit  gt  System  gt
99. MIDI Devices window  ido si make sure your MIDI device driver has been properly  installed     d  Press OK to set the selected MIDI devices as your MIDI sources     NOTE  Some MIDI programs may prevent playback if opened before  SmartScore  By closing the first MIDI program  the output  port will be released     4 1 5 Audio MIDI Setup  Mac OS X Only     To access Audio MIDI Setup in Mac OS X  locate    Utilities    folder  inside the    Applications    folder  Double click on Audio MIDI Setup      eee  Lw 10  iae    T Le Lhi  ries f    SP Artie U Ty  E Per allie Asili  E Appi Spuiem Profiler    b A Miia Ter   Extras    M uda wn san  4  Glarinoth File Lathange  FIGURE 4   3  Applications  gt  Utilities  gt  Audio MIDI Setup  OS X     If you have external MIDI devices installed such as an external synthe   sizer module and MIDI interface  they should appear as icons in the  window  Using your mouse  drag the    Out    arrow of the source device  to the    In    arrow of the receiving device and vice versa  Internal con   nections should then be established  Close Audio MIDI Setup f    Bade MEN ier    heb ony    pa    feson oir        FIGURE 4   4  Connecting MIDI Devices in Audio MIDI Setup       USING SmartScore 59    ENF Playback    With SmartScore ENF file open  go to Playback menu  click and select  Playback at the bottom of the list  Choose CoreMIDI Playback to acti   vate devices connected in Audio MIDI Setup        FIGURE 4   5  Selecting external MIDI devices in SmartSc
100. MIDI Type 0  Single Track Multiple  Channels  or MIDI Type 1  Multiple Tracks   Multiple Chan   nels      b  Push the Save button  A window appears saying the following     Articulations such as slurs  staccatos and legatos will result in a  MIDI file that will not import properly into a notation program   Choose whether you want your MIDI file for importing into a nota   tion program or for playback only     c  Choose Remove or Keep Articulations according to your need        208 USING SmartScore    MIDI Editing and Sequencing       USING SmartScore 209    Properties Tool                               211    Tool Paletios    sess a a pos iaa er ene eA eters eee eas 211  ENF PILE Menu   ss2 24 Sets 2 cite Se ee ere  S8 218  ENF EDIT Menu                              223  ENF VIEW Menu                            229  ENF OPTIONS Menu                       234  ENF PLAYBACK Menu             577777     237  ENF Help Menu                             238  MIDI FILE Menu 052 5 oe reo w areas Soba eb ee 239  MIDI EDIT Menu       sie ose ee eee ee ees 240  MIDI VIEW Menu                           241  MIDI OPTIONS Menu                           242  OMS  Mac Classic Only                           243  MIDI REALTIME Menu                           244  MIDI WINDOW Menu                         245  Image File Menu Items                            245  Image EDIT Menu                           246  Image VIEW Menu                            248  Image REALTIME Menu                       
101. Option    Click       2 3 2 ENF Editing    The original scanned image is displayed in the upper window and the  newly recognized ENF file appears below it  Use the scroller bars   mouse wheel  or arrow keys on your keyboard to scroll up and down  the page  Notice the image and ENF windows are synchronized for  comparison     pelt ow     Sf   ete Pe Teh hel           i A f  m  bim pfp Et oo Tite  Serer Le e t eF rele    dgan       FIGURE 2   3  Sample TIFF   ENF view    In ENF  only one staff line is active at a time  The active staff displays  black while inactive staff lines display as grey  To make a staff line  active  move your cursor to within the boundary of the staff until it  highlights black  If you want all staves to display in black  go to the  View menu and uncheck Show Active Staff  If you do this  remember  to move your cursor within a staff line first before doing any editing  within a staffline  For more info  see visiting staff line tip on page 153        USING SmartScore 11    Installation and Quick Tour    NOTE  In this manual  Quick Keys  keyboard shortcuts  are indicated    in bold parentheses  e g   C      As accurate as SmartScore is  you should always check for errors in  recognition  Sometimes only a few simple edits are all that is required     e To see all staff lines in black  go to the View menu and un check     Show Active Staff     Editing is done a staff to staff basis  If you  are unsure to which staff a note belongs  turn this back on  To  qu
102. Score Part   To move a Score Header vertically   While holding the Shift button  click and drag score header up or  down    11 4 20 Edit  gt Tempo   To set the default tempo    a  Select desired Beats per Minute from the horizontal slider    b  Choose a base note Tempo Value  4 4 default   quarter note      c  Check the Metronome Mark Visibility box to display the Met   ronome Mark in the ENF document in the first measure     Refer to    Tempo Markings  Metronome Mark     on page 156 for enter   ing change of tempo  metronome  markings        USING SmartScore 227    Reference  11 4 21 Edit  gt  Guitar Chord Library    The Guitar Chord library contains preset guitar chords and associated  chord symbols  You may add  change  delete and store any custom  chords  Guitar frets and chord symbols automatically transpose with  key transposition  Refer to    Guitar Frets and Chord Symbols    on  page 99 for details     11 4 22 Edit  gt  Join Voices    Automatically join offset voices to one    vertical event    as described in     To globally join offset voices  automatic method      on page 65     11 4 23 Edit  gt Transpose  Ctrl  T  Cmnd T     Transpose your score by key or by clef  Limit to a part  a voice or select  a range  Refer to    Transposition    on page 139 for details     11 4 24 Edit  gt  Edit Mode     Zoom  Ctrl Z  Cmnd Z   e Select tool  Ctrl O  Cmnd O   e Insert   Change   See    Insert and Change modes    on page 79     e Delete by Group   Delete Any   See    Delete 
103. T Menu  11 17 1 Edit  gt  Undo  Ctrl  Z   Cmnd Z     Reverses the last action you performed  SmartScore has ninety nine  layers of Undo     11 17 2 Edit  gt  Redo  Ctrl  Y  Cmnd Y  Reapplies the last action that has been Undone     11 17 3 Edit  gt  Cut  Ctrl  X   Cmnd X     Removes the selected section from the image file and places it on the  clipboard       246 USING SmartScore    Reference  11 17 4 Edit  gt  Copy  Ctrl  C   Cmnd C     Places selected section on the clipboard without removing it from the  image file     11 17 5 Edit  gt  Paste  Ctrl  V  Cmnd V   Insert the contents of the clipboard back into the image file  11 17 6 Edit  gt  Delete  Del   Deletes the selected section from the image file   11 17 7 Edit  gt  Crop  Trims the image file down to the selected region  11 17 8 Edit  gt  Invert  Switches the colors of the image file   11 17 9 Edit  gt  Rotate  e Left  Rotates the image file counter clockwise    e Right  Rotates the image file clockwise  e Any  Opens the Rotate window for rotation by defines degrees     11 17 10 Edit  gt  Selection  Activates the Area Selection tool   11 17 11 Edit  gt  Line  Activates the Line drawing tool   11 17 12 Edit  gt  Brush  Activates the Brush tool   11 17 13 Edit  gt  Deskew  Activates the Deskew tool for straightening    crooked    scans    11 17 14 Edit  gt  Selection Mode  e Opaque       USING SmartScore 247    Reference    When a selected area is moved to the clipboard the back   ground will be included    e Transpar
104. Type column to open an event specific window   You may type in a new value     10 6 4 Inserting Non Note Events    Any MIDI event that is not a note on or note off event is a non note  event  This includes MIDI Control Changes  Program Changes  Chan   nel Pressure  Pitch Bend information  and Meta Events     To insert a non note event in the Event List view     a  Select the event you want the non note event to follow   b  Press the New button     The New Event window will open        USING SmartScore 199    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    c  Use the Event Type menu to select the event to be added     NOTE  Some events  such as Control Change and Meta Event  have  Subtype event listings  Choose one if applicable     d  Press OK     e Program Changes  Program Change inserts a MIDI event that changes the instrument  playback for a given channel   voice   To insert a Program Change of the voice channel in Create New Event   a  Program Change is the default New Event  so simply press OK   The selected Program Change will be inserted into the Event List   b  Use the Voice pull down menu to designate the voice to which  the Program Change applies   c  Use the Other pull down menu to select a new instrument     e Control Changes    Control Changes send adjustable parameters to your selected MIDI  device i e   vibrato  hold  volume  pan  effects  etc  You can add spe   cific changes to these controls from within SmartScore   s Event List  To  find out more about what each control chan
105. USING  SMA TSCOREs       PRECISION Music SCANNING    Music is a kind of counting performed by the  mind without knowing that it is counting     GW  Leibnitz  1714     Mathematics is music for the mind   Music is mathematics for the soul     Anonymous  18th century     MUSITEK     Moser lisansa Tinomana       410 Bryant Circle  Suite K  Ojai  CA 93023  Copyright 2003   Musitek   All rights reserved        Registration    Warranty       Customer  Service    Web Page  E Mail  Phone   FAX  Address    Technical  Support    Tech Page  E Mail    Phone   FAX    Customer Service Plan    NOTE  If you ordered your product directly from Musitek you won   t find  a registration card  you are already registered     Please complete and return your registration card  It costs you nothing to  do so  You will only be able to receive technical support if you are a regis   tered owner of this product  Registering your product is important for you  in many ways     e You will be eligible for free periodic updates from our web   site as well as special upgrade prices for future product  releases     e You will be given priority access to Musitek Technical Sup   port as well as to Customer Service using your Customer ID     All Musitek products are covered by a limited 90 day warranty  To  replace a defective CD that is still under warranty  contact Musitek Cus   tomer Service  Out of warranty CDs and manuals can be ordered online or  by phone  A nominal charge will be applied     Musitek   s websi
106. a new score  leaving the current file  unaffected  Or press OK to isolate the part in the open document     Here is the result of extracting Voice  1 from the right hand piano part        FIGURE 8   5  Extracted Voice    8 1 3 Active System vs  Super System    When you position your cursor over a given system and open the Sys   tem Manager  what you see displayed is a representation of the active  or highlighted system  Some parts may have their visibility checked on  and some may not depending on whether or not a particular part  appears in the active system  When the System Manager is opened  the  default    controlling system    is always the active system     During Recognition  the system containing the greatest number of  staves will register that total number in a special controlling system  within the System Manager  This register is called the Super System  and it represents the true number of parts in the score  Normally  the       USING SmartScore 117    Changing Score Structure    Super System and the largest System Manager will have the same num   ber of parts  Occasionally  however  total actual instrumental parts may  exceed the number of staves per system in the largest system of the  score  as represented in the list of Part Names inside the System Man   ager   For example  the largest system may not contain an instrumental  part that appears elsewhere  See    Re link Parts    on page 121 for more  information about re linking parts and dealing with scores ha
107. ach channel contains note and non   note event data  Most MIDI devices can support up to 16 MIDI Chan   nels at one time     Patch   Every MIDI channel has a MIDI patch assigned to it  A Patch  is the instrument sound selected for a particular channel when playing  back     Program Change   Same as a patch  Indicates a change of patch within  a given channel or track     Bank   MIDI devices divide patches into groups of 128  One Bank of  patches from a MIDI device can be accessed at a time by a MIDI com   puter program or another MIDI device        USING SmartScore 255    Glossary    Port   A computer can run several MIDI devices at a time with the  proper hardware  Each device is connected to a unique Port     12 5 SmartScore Terms    ENF   Extended Notation Format  This is SmartScore   s proprietary file  format  It is created after scanning  when creating a new score or when  converting an imported MIDI file into ENF  MIDI to ENF      Navigator   The floating window containing buttons designed to    nav   igate    through SmartScore   s main features and editing environments     System Manager   The System Manager is a sort of    virtual system     which allows for manipulating all or specific voices  parts and systems  in the score  Generally  it is a list of all the parts and voices that make  up the LARGEST system in the score  The System Manager is the basis  of many editing features including  Visibility  Voices  Spacing  and  Part Names     Voice Line Threading   Sma
108. aff     Py TIP  To adjust vertical placement of a rest  hold the SHIFT key  7   down  click and drag the rest up or down        USING SmartScore 131    Detailed ENF Editing  To change the pitch of several notes at once     a  Press    O    key to activate the Select tool  also in SmartScore  Toolbar     b  Click and drag a box around any series of notes     c  Hold down the    Shift    key and drag the notes with the mouse     9 2 Quick Keys  Pu TIP  Refer to the Quick Keys maps on page 174 for a graphic depic     S tion of all SmartScore keyboard shortcut keys   9 2 1 QuickSelect  Ctrl   Click     The fastest way to choose any object for inserting and changing is to  QuickSelect it  Ctrl   Click on any object inside the active staff and  the cursor inherits all of that object   s attributes The mouse pointer  becomes any object that is QuickSelected     9 2 2 Insert and Change Modes  C   To insert a note or rest anywhere in the active staffline   a  Toggle the    C    key to activate the Insert mode   b  Select any note or rest from the    Notes    or    Rests    palette   c  Click anywhere in the active staff to drop the object   To insert a multi measure rest   e Select the    n measures    object from the    Rests    palette   e Select the number of empty measures   e Click in an empty measure of the active staffline   To change the rhythmic value of an existing note or rest   a  Toggle the    C    key to the Change mode   b  Select any note value from the    Notes    or 
109. age dithered by scanner    intelligence          NOTE  If still you fail to get a workable image using SmartScore   s  scanning interface  turn to    Choosing an alternative scanning  interface    on page 30     3 2 3 Scanner settings    e Darkness   Brightness    The default darkness setting is  15   For typical printed music  this  setting should be fine  If beams smear together and whole and half  notes appear closed or    blobbed     then brighten the scan  If the original  music is faded  if it is a weak copy or if it has become degraded  you  may want to scan even darker than the default setting  SmartScore  wants to see solid  well defined lines that are neither razor thin nor  smeared together     NOTE  If recognition accuracy is poorer than expected  examine the  file in the Image Editor  Zoom in and determine the follow   ing    e If objects lack detail  rescan with increased resolution     e If objects such as note stems and staff lines are broken or lack  thickness  rescan with increased darkness     e Resolution    It is recommended that you use Auto Resolution whenever possible  If  you choose to set resolution manually  check Auto Resolution off  For  most printed music  the recommended resolution is around 350 dpi     If the original music is printed in smaller type  you can increase resolu   tion to 400 or 450 dpi  For miniature scores  try 500 dpi  Scanning at  too high or too low a resolution may actually reduce recognition accu   racy  It is not recommende
110. al Drums  go to the Realtime menu and select Virtual Drum Kit   See for more information        USING SmartScore 207    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    10 12 Playback Considerations after MIDI Editing    If you return to the ENF view after editing in the MIDI environment   playback will retain changes made in MIDI views until the ENF dis   play is updated with    MIDI Refresh     If notation is subsequently edited  in ENF or if MIDI Refresh is selected  you will be given a choice of A   Keeping current MIDI playback B  Refreshing ENF and clearing previ   ous changes made in MIDI or C  Saving the current playback as a  MIDI file     Refer to    Updating and refreshing playback and display    on page 177  for more information on how ENF and MIDI views are inter related     10 13 MIDI to ENF    SmartScore accepts any Standard MIDI file and converts it to an ENF  file Turn to    MIDI to ENF    on page 170 for details     10 14 Saving MIDI Files    When saving a MIDI file  remember that you are not saving a music  notation file  The more    humanized    the MIDI file sounds  the less  likely it will appear correctly when imported into a music notation  application  such as SmartScore  Saving SmartScore files derived from  scanning will normally give reasonably good results because the music  is already    quantized    into discreet start and stop times     To save a SmartScore MIDI file     a  Select FILE  gt  Save As  click the    Save as Type    pull down  menu and select either 
111. amic marking     a  While in the Insert mode  select a dynamic marking from the     Dynamics    palette           USING SmartScore    157    Detailed ENF Editing    b  Click anywhere above the active staff  A change in playback vol   ume  MIDI Volume  for that particular active staff  MIDI track   then will apply     c  Changes in note volumes range as follows   Pppp   35   ppp   45   pp   55  p   65   mp   75  mf   85  f 95   ff   105   fff   115   ffff   125     NOTE  Dynamics apply only to the active staffline  To apply dynam   ics and or dynamic markings to more than one staff  enter the  dynamic in each part in which you want the effect to apply  If  you do not wish to have multiple dynamics visible  you may  enter dynamics in the Hidden Symbols mode  For more  details see    Hidden Symbols    on page 155     To insert a hairpin   a  Toggle the    C    key to the Insert mode     b  Select a dynamic hairpin from the    Dynamics    palette or hit  Shift              for crescendo hairpin and Shift             for decrescendo     c  Click and drag to select notes for which a hairpin is to be applied     d  Dragging downward will insert the hairpin above the active staff   Dragging upwards will insert the hairpin below the active staff     a       FIGURE 9   16  Hairpin crescendo  drag upwards   To insert a crescendo or decrescendo     a  Select Cresc  or Decresc  from the    Dynamics    tool palette        1 5 8 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing    b  In Insert mode 
112. and closes Mini Console toolbar     11 7 6 Playback  gt  MIDI Devices    Opens MIDI device dialog box  Select MIDI input and output sources   Refer to    MIDI Devices    on page 58 for details     11 7 7 Playback  gt  Swing  Turns swing playback on or off  Refer to    Swing    on page 72     11 7 8 Playback  gt  Sound tone when entering note    Notes will sound their pitch when entered or when shifted up or down   Check this option off to not sound pitches while editing        USING SmartScore 237    Reference    11 7 9 Playback  gt  Sound grace notes     Select whether to play grace notes before the following note  default   or on the beat of the following note  Refer to    Grace Notes    on  page 81    11 7 10 Playback  gt  Trills    Trills can be played with diatonic permutations going either up or down  from the home tone  Select Up for permutations to play upwards or  Down for them to play downwards     11 7 11 Playback  gt  Drum Set    This window allows you to map MIDI Drum instruments to staff lines  and spaces when percussion clef is assigned to a staff  For more details   turn to    Percussion clef  Clefs Palette     on page 107     11 7 12 Playback  gt  Lock to Time Signature  Refer to    Lock to Time Signature    on page 67     11 7 13 Playback  gt  Graphical Controller    Refer to    Graphical controllers    on page 69     11 7 14 Playback  gt  Refresh MIDI    Refresh MIDI resets playback based on the current ENF display  All  changes made in MIDI view including 
113. ansposition and color  when Color   Part mode   When an  instrument is selected from the Part Name pull down menu in the Sys   tem Manager  it is directly linked to the same name and its assigned  characteristics in Instrument Templates  Any or all of these characteris   tics can be changed at any time        USING SmartScore 147    Detailed ENF Editing    To open  modify or add a new instrument template     a  Hit  Ctrl F Cmnd F  or choose Edit  gt  Instrument Templates     imine emil          rare na   j    Apoi et a fe lai  e  ENE a      FIGURE 9   9  Instrument Template window    b  Instrument color can be changed by double clicking in its color  field  When Part   Color in Options  gt  Color Mode  notation  for parts associated with this instrument will inherit this color     c  Click in the Name field of any template and type to change the  given name of an instrument     d  To change an abbreviation  click then type inside the Abbr field     e  Click and select a different MIDI instrument from the Instru   ment list to change default MIDI instrument assignment     f  Transpose displays the default playback transposition for  selected instruments  The MIDI representation will reflect the  transposed shift in pitch     g  Various sets of MIDI instruments can be selected in Instrument  Settings pull down menu  Instrument sets acquire their names by  clicking on the Instrument Settings button and selecting a set     h  To save settings for future ENF files  check    Save f
114. ant to alter   b  Select Ctrl   M  Cmnd   M Mac  to open the System Manager   c  Changing Line Spacing increases or decreases the space between    lines in staves and resizes noteheads  Changing Staff Spacing  increases or decreases the distance between staves     NOTE  Staff Spacing of the last part will determine the space between  systems  It is usually about double the other staff spacings     d  Check the Spacing box in the    Apply    area     e  In the    Apply To    pull down menu  select the active system  all  subsequent systems  System   or All  Press Apply then OK to  close     8 1 6 Adding a staff when missed by recognition    Occasionally  a staff inside a system may not be localized during recog   nition due to flaws in the image or otherwise  If so  the system in ENF  to which it belongs will not display that part  Missing staves can be  inserted quite easily as follows     a  First  you want to re link parts in the shorted system  Position the  cursor inside the system and hit Ctrl   L to open Re link Parts    b  Put a check next to the appropriate visible parts  Leave the miss   ing part unchecked  Hit OK    c  Open System Manager  Ctrl   M   You should see a part with a  missing check mark along the left side  This means it is invisible    d  Check the part  and check the Visibility box in the Apply section    e  Change the Apply To  pull down menu from Score to System   Hit Apply to preview or OK to apply and close System Manager     f  Hit the    U    key
115. any note event will open the Note Event window        Hote Event             FIGURE 10   18  Note Event window    The Note Event window allows access to and adjustment of an individ   ual note   s parameters     e Raise or lower the Pitch of the Note Event       USING SmartScore 191    MIDI Editing and Sequencing       Start Time changes when the Note Event begins   e The Duration of the Note Event can be shortened or lengthened  e Increase or decrease the Velocity of the Note Event   e Select a different Voice for the Note Event    10 5 9 Cut Copy and Paste    Click and drag the mouse or use Edit  gt  Select to select a region of note  events that you would like to cut  copy or paste     e Cut removes the highlighted notes from the score and places  them in the clipboard     e Copy stores the selected notes to the clipboard without removing  them from the score     e Paste will insert the contents of the clipboard back into the score  without deleting the existing notes  Click where you want to  insert the music into the score     e Paste Special will open the Paste Special window       Add to existing events   Replace existing events Cancel         Move to make room                Repetitions          pea  Start from time     ra            Start fromtrack      Allto track       1  PianoR                FIGURE 10   19  Paste Special    The Paste Special window offers several options for pasting the con   tents of the clipboard back into the music     e Add to existing events
116. art   Defined by Voice  System within System Manager Number in Number in Sys   System Manager System Manager  tem Manager  Equivalents in MIDI View  MIDI File MIDI Track MIDI Track MIDI Channel                   8 4 5 Controlling Voices within Score Structure    To view voices in Score Structure  click on    Show Voices    button  If  Color Mode   Voice  you will notice voice names also show their  voice color  Voices have special meaning in Smart score  They are  tightly linked to each other logically and physically  Vertical Event  joining for example   Since voices are    locked    to one another in ways  that Parts and Score Parts are not  it is not possible to re link voices to  other Parts or Score Parts  You can  however  extract voices separately  or in select groups from within the System Manager  See  Extracting  voices using Visibility   Section 8 1 2  on page 116 for more        USING SmartScore 127    More ENF navigating                            129    Quick Keys          6 24 eee eee et ee ee e a 132  QuickSelect  Ctrl   Click                       132  Insert and Change Modes  C                       132  Delete by Group   Delete Any  X                    133   Select Tool  O        164  Saba ee Rees Aes eee S 133  Using the Select tool for quick deletions                     133  Using the Select Tool  O  to edit selected objects             134  Dots  D  eri Ser Sa E an a EAE E A E E See 134  TES  V  x23 So sees a Sees E a e a a E 135  Beam direction  A    
117. art  each staffline of  the score  can contain a maximum of 4 voices  represented by 4 col   ors   We recommend that you normally view your ENF files with voice  color on  An alternative note coloring method  useful in orchestral  scores  is to view each Part  each staffline  with a unique color  For  more about coloring parts and voices  see    Working with Voices and  Colors    on page 149     TIP  When Color Mode   Voice  the number of MIDI channels will  be increased to equal the total number of voices in the score   When Color Mode   Part  the number of channels equals num   ber of parts  far less than if Color Mode   Voice  Open Play   back Console  Ctrl   9   Cmnd   9  in either mode to view the  difference     4 4 2 Assigning instruments to voices    Assigning a unique MIDI instrument to each voiceline adds richness  and tonal variety while allowing the listener to distinguish one contra   puntal voice from all others during playback  There are two areas  where you can change MIDI instrument assignments for voices  inside  the Playback Console and inside the System Manager     To change an instrument assignment of a voice in the Playback Con   sole     a  Set Options  gt  Color Mode to Voice  Open the Playback Con   sole  Ctrl  9   Cmnd   9  or select acini  gt  Console        FIGURE 4   7  Changing MIDI instrument of a voice in Playback Console       USING SmartScore 63    SONG  BOOK    PIANO    M    GUITAR    ENF Playback    The Track column displays each ENF Part a
118. at  Tick numbers or solely with Tick numbers     11 12 3 Options  gt  Velocity Format    Select whether Velocity of note events is displayed with absolute num   bers or as percentages     11 12 4 Options  gt  File Settings    Opens Sequence Settings window  Shows the MIDI header information  including  tempo  time base  time signature  key  and MIDI instrument     11 12 5 Options  gt  Track  not in Overview     Opens Track Properties dialog box  Select a different track view   delete  duplicate  rename  or transpose the selected track     11 12 6 Options  gt  MIDI Device  Opens MIDI device dialog box  Select MIDI input and output sources   11 12 7 Options  gt  Instrument Settings    Opens Instrument Settings dialog box  Allows for selection of Port   Bank  and MIDI channel assignment for Instrument and Drum sources     11 12 8 Options  gt  Metronome Settings    Opens Metronome Settings dialog box  Allows for selection of Port   MIDI Channel  number of lead in measures  MIDI sound and volume  for Primary and Secondary beats     11 12 9 Options  gt  Shuttle On    Activate  deactivate SmartScore   s shuttle tool     11 13 OMS  Mac Classic Only   11 13 1 OMS MIDI Setup    Displays the current port selection for MIDI Device connection to your  computer  A new Setup can be created from here        USING SmartScore 243    Reference  11 13 2 OMS Studio Setup  Launches OMS for editing of your current OMS studio setup    11 13 3 All Notes Off  Shuts off MIDI output     11 14 MIDI REALT
119. by Group   Delete  Any  X     on page 133     e Edit Shapes   See    Voice Splitting  H     on page 151   11 4 25 Edit  gt  Special  e Vertical Alignment  Y    See    Vertical Alignment    on page 64     e Beam Notes  B    See    To convert a sequence of flagged notes into  one beamed group     on page 134     e Split Voices  H    See    Voice Splitting  H     on page 151   e Flip Stems  S    See    Stem direction  S     on page 135     e Delete Selected Ties  Articulations  G    See    Occasionally  you  might find an area full of incorrectly recognized ties and or slurs or  hairpins  Use this tool to    mass delete    these objects     on page 133        228 USING SmartScore    Reference  11 4 26 Edit  gt  Error Check  Ctrl  E   Cmnd E     Automatically check for errors such as missing notes and rests in voice   lines  Refer to    Error Check    on page 83 for more details     11 5 ENF VIEW Menu  11 5 1 View  gt  Toolbars  e Navigator  Opens and closes the SmartScore Navigator   e Main  Opens and closes Main Toolbar  e SmartScore  Opens and closes SmartScore Toolbar  e Image  Opens and closes Image Editing Toolbar  e Text and Controllers    Opens and closes the toolbar containing control buttons for text and  graphical controllers     e Mini Console    Opens and closes the Mini playback console in ENF view     e Status Bar    Opens and closes Status Bar at the bottom of main SmartScore Win   dow  Displays current page  cursor position  image size  and zoom per   centage  Cl
120. can also be controlled in an    entirely different way by using the Score Structure feature  See     Score Structure    on page 124 for more details on how to iso   late  recombine and or remove parts and voices from a score     9 6 5 Applying changes to the score    Changes you make to System Manager will apply to the area of interest  you select in the    Apply To    pull down menu     e All   Applies the change to all systems of the score  including Super Sys   tem   Used when you want a change to be globally applied    e System   Applies only to the currently active system     e System   Applies to the currently active system and all subsequent systems     e Score Part  Applies to the Score or Score Part  but not the Super System     e Super System  Applies changed values only to the Super System     To apply changes     e OK  Applies changes to the current ENF document        Apply  Applies changes and allows further editing in System Manager     e Apply to New   Creates and opens a new ENF document with changes applied to it   This action does not affect the original document which remains open  behind the newly created ENF document  Minimize window of top   most document to view other open ENF files      TIP  Apply to New is useful when you want to extract parts or  voices to a new ENF document without affecting the original        1 46 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing    Controlling System will determine whether selected values apply to  the active system or t
121. can button in the scanning  window  If you selected a resolution outside of the optimum  range  you will be prompted for the best possible resolution in  dpi  Push Retry and reset the recommended resolution  Ignore  sends you to the    Scan Next Page   Begin Recognition    dialog   See    Recognition Sequence  Win   Mac     on page 37      If your scanner does not respond properly  choose File  gt  Scan Music  gt   Choose Interface  gt  Your Scanner   s  gt  Manual        USING SmartScore 35    Scanning and Recognition       3 4 6   Choosing Your Scanner   s Interface  Manual  For Mac  Classic  Users Only     Choose Interface  gt  Your Scanner   s  gt  Manual option is the third and  final Macintosh option for scanning within SmartScore itself  Using the  Manual option is similar to using Automatic option  except for final  previewing  cropping  de skewing and paging which is controlled by a  special    Image Processing    window  If your scanner still does not  respond properly in this mode  it will be necessary to scan outside of  SmartScore  See    Scanning Outside of SmartScore    on page 42 for  those details     a  Push the Scan button or File  gt  Scan Music  gt  Acquire  Your  scanner   s interface should appear on screen     b  With your mouse  click and drag the edges of the scan region to  create maximum sized image  It is very important to acquire a  full sized image in the preview window of your scanner   s inter   face  Subsequent scans may cut off regions of th
122. cept Ponda       FIGURE 11   11  Selecting PDF995 to create a PDF file     Select File  gt  Save As PDF  to generate a PDF file out of your ENF file   Browse to any directory to save the PDF file on your computer     Mac OS X Only     In the Print window  select PDF to generate a PDF file  Browse to save        USING SmartScore 221    Reference  11 3 12 File  gt  CD Writer  Windows Only     Using the CD Writer feature  you will be able to record one or more  ENF  MIDI playback  performances as a audio CD playable in your  car  home stereo  etc  It will be necessary to have a CD R  CD Writ   able  device installed and connected to your system  CD Writer will  also record and burn MIDI files     To record ENF or MIDI files and burn them to audio CD      ep a  Push the CD Writer icon at the bottom of the Navigator         b  Push    Add Files    and select one or more ENF or MIDI files to be  recorded to CD     OS riScaen s OF Writes    pe DS 37 COA GOES aiia  Cres ippa  OMe   Basiran ipei bja  hhe de 70    Bam method  ETT    Dic bum  T Grib ara  E inpo iin Biej j  Dior botad  Tapa  CO AGM o  Hea ete  Need pare TAL   ea  Eetmahedspene Mini Me          F guisam    nmh   a   le            FIGURE 11   12     c  Each selected file must undergo a conversion to an audio format     WAV is the default   After converting  the selected file s  will  appear in the    Files to Burn    list as an audio        222 USING SmartScore    Reference    Files may be reordered using the    Move Up   
123. change the default background color of the TIFF or ENF window    a  Select Options  gt  Define Colors  gt  Background   b  Choose either Image Pane or ENF Pane    c  Click to select a new color and push OK   To change the default color of Hidden Symbols    a  Select Options  gt  Define Colors  gt  Hidden Symbols   b  Choose a new color and push OK     9 8 5 Voice Splitting  H   To separate a two note cluster to two separate voices   a  Hit the    O    key to activate the Select tool   b  Drag a box around any number of two note clusters     c  Press the    H    key to separate two note clusters into 2 voices     a  t    a    FIGURE 9   10  Splitting two note chords into 2 voices    y TIP  Music ministers and choir directors  Use this handy tool to    split two note clusters into 2 voices  e g  hymnals   Assign each  voice a unique instrument or extract each voice to a separate  file     y TIP  If you wish to split clusters containing three or more notes     select and delete the least desirable notes until you are left with  two notes in each cluster  Only two note clusters will split        USING SmartScore 15 1    Detailed ENF Editing  9 8 6   Cross staff voicing    Occasionally  notes of one voice may    visit    an adjacent staff  Techni   cally  visiting notes belong to their    home    staff  But they obtain their  pitch information from the visiting staff line  In order to maintain voice  continuity  cross staff  visiting  notes must be handled in a special way     To 
124. cific symbols and helps to remove any    false positives        f  Refer to    Recognition Options    on page 38 for details on how  recognition options function        44 USING SmartScore    Scanning and Recognition  3 7 1 Rearranging the File List    If you scan more than 9 pages  you may notice    PagelO    is listed  before    Page2     This is because most operating systems list files  according to the first character of the filename  Click on any page and  hit Move Up or Move Down to reposition  Hitting Remove Files from  List will cause that page to be skipped during Recognition     3 7 2 Recombining multiple image files  Creating new Page  Groups for Recognition  and re saving a multiple page  image file    If one page of a scanned group is incorrectly scanned or is missing alto   gether from a multi page image file  Page group   you may reselect  individual pages to form a new page group     a  Select  or drag  the original multi page file inside the selected  files list of the Begin Recognition window     b  Highlight a page to remove and push Remove Files from List     c  To add a replacement or additional page to the original page  group  select or drag the page s  to the selected files list     d  Reorder pages as necessary     NOTE  If pages were reordered  added to or deleted from the original  image file  you will be able to re save the newly listed pages     To Save a modified list of grouped pages as a new image file     e Select all pages so they are highli
125. cing    b  Select a new Instrument from the pull down menu  In Voice  Color mode  select a voice number from the Voice pull down  menu  This will apply the new instrument sound to the selected  voice  voices will automatically be assigned different MIDI  channels   For more about Voice Color Mode  turn to    Working  with Voices and Colors    on page 149     c  Press OK     NOTE  List of instruments is determined by the selected Instrument  set selected in Options  gt  Instrument Settings  Instrument  set is also able to be selected in the Playback Console  see  page 61      d  An inverted red triangle will indicate the point where the pro   gram change was inserted  Clicking on any Program Change tri   angle will open the Program Change window for additional  changes     NOTE  SmartScore supports multiple MIDI channels within each  MIDI track  This allows for contrapuntal voices within ENF  stafflines to be assigned to different instruments within each  MIDI track  In other words  multiple voices in ENF are  equivalent to multiple channels within a MIDI track  This is a  sort of hybrid MIDI type  MIDI Type 1 Type 0 hybrid      10 5 5 MIDI Instrument settings  To change MIDI instrument parameters     a  Select Instrument Settings under the Options menu  In Play   back Console  push the Set Instrument button  This will open  the Instrument Settings window     INSTRUERT SETTINGS  ane p H r P 4    T123 tter a WA We mE    areni  Gee aa a a aa a rer  ec Aorere eere erie  Cinara ee
126. click and drag a curve over the  range you wish to apply the effect        USING SmartScore 185    mjo    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    10 5 2 Switching between tracks  e To move from track to track  click the Track Paging buttons  located in the Main Toolbar     10 5 3 Shuttle Tool    The Shuttle Tool allows you to sound MIDI events forward or back   ward by dragging the mouse over a range of events     To operate the Shuttle Tool     In Piano Roll view  the    S    key toggles the Shuttle Tool off and on  To  manually select  press the Toggle Shuttle button in the MIDI Toolbar  or go to the Options menu and select Shuttle On  Click and hold any   where in an Overview or Piano Roll and drag the Shuttle Tool to the  right to play the MIDI file at your own tempo  Drag the Shuttle Tool to  the left to rewind and hear the MIDI file simultaneously     To insert or change the voice assignment of selected note event s      a  Use the Voice Selection pull down menu located above the piano  keyboard to select a voice number     b  Right click and drag to create a note event   10 5 4 Inserting program changes  Assign MIDI instrument   To insert a Program Change  MIDI patch change  for any given voice     a  In an active track  position cursor and click wherever you wish to  make an instrument change  Select Edit  gt  Program Change   ee Eo     al tel    va A ae ae ed          br    FIGURE 10   12  MIDI Program Change  Piano Roll        1 86 USING SmartScore    MIDI Editing and Sequen
127. create cross staff voicing     a  If the visiting note is part of a beamed group  use the Shift button  to click and drag the notehead up  or down  into the adjacent  staff  Then drag to the line or space you to position it     NOTE  Notes that    visit    adjacent staves do not display any ledger  lines  They inherit their pitch from the space or line of the     visited    staff     b  To create a cross staff note with a flipped stem  create a two note  beam  Toggle the    C    key to Change mode  then right click   option   click for Mac  on the note you wish to flip  Drag the  flipped note head into the desired staff and position it to the  desired line or space  Once in place  you may insert any addi   tional beamed notes using the middle beam tool in    Notes    pal   ette     c  If the visiting note is stand alone  not part of a beamed group    choose whether you want the cross staff indicator lines to be  solid or dotted  View  gt  Cross staff Voicing  gt  Solid or Dotted      d  Drag the notehead up  or down  to an adjacent staff and position  it over the desired line or space        Cross staff voice  Cross staff voice  flipped stem    beamed notes     Cross staff voice   flagged note     FIGURE 9   11  Cross staff voicing       1 5 2 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing  To edit a cross staff note in a    visiting    staffline       a  Position the mouse pointer over the    home    staff of the    visiting     note     b  Hit the CapLock button  On   Shift   dra
128. d bounded area  move your mouse pointer  over a boundary line  click and drag the boundary to a new posi   tion    d  Select Crop from the Edit menu OR press the Crop button in the      Image Toolbar  The resulting image will be reduced to the area  inside the bounded frame  Remember to Save when done        USING SmartScore 51    Scanning and Recognition    e Correcting Skew    Page through each scanned image and check for relative straightness of  each image page  If a page appears tilted or skewed  recognition accu   racy will be compromised  The Deskew tool will rotate the image  slightly to correct skewed pages and will optimize recognition accu   racy     a  Press the Deskew button in the Image Toolbar or select Deskew  from the Edit menu        Wor eer  i Nicolai Rimsky Korsakoif    Drag deskew  tool along  topmost       staffline       b  Position the cursor over a staffline  Starting from the left side   click and drag the mouse along the length of the staffline  A red     skew angle    line will display as you drag the mouse  When you  are certain the red    skew angle    line parallels the staffline  let go   The page will automatically straighten  Repeat for each page   Remember to Save when done     NOTE  Ifthe page becomes incorrectly rotated  undo with Ctrl   z    Cmnd   z for Mac  or select Edit  gt  Undo    e Rotate       To rotate an image file  for landscape formatted scores or upside down          Li   scans   go to the Edit menu and highlight Rotate OR pr
129. d in SmartScore can be selected from one of  several Tool Palettes  By default  up to 3 palettes remain open at one  time  Palettes    recycle    by default  but you may have all open at once     BY TIP  The F1 key always resets windows and palettes to their default        1 30 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing    TIP  To quickly select an alternative Tool Palette  right click on any   pu open Tool Palette   Mac  Ctrl   click   All Tool Palettes     become available to select  Notice the open palette becomes  replaced with the selected palette when in the Recycle mode     While selecting an alternative palette  you may choose one of 4 modes     e Show All opens all 9 SmartScore Tool Palettes      Hide All removes all Tool Palettes from view   e Reset  F1  returns to default display of Notes and Rests palettes     e Recycle  Default  changes the secondary open palette when a  Quick Key is activated  The Notes palette remains open and does  not cycle        FIGURE 9   4  Tool Palette Selection    You may also use the function keys along the top of your computer  keyboard to choose any of the available Tool Palettes  F1 will reset the  palettes to their default display settings     NOTE  For detailed functions of all tool palettes  turn to  Tool Pal   ettes   Section 11 2  on page 211   9 1 6 Pitch shift  Shift   drag   To change the pitch of any note     SI e Hold down the    Shift    key  click on and drag a note head up or  down to shift its vertical position in the st
130. d to scan music below 250 dpi or higher than  600 dpi        USING SmartScore 29    Scanning and Recognition  e Manual or Automatic Source  Document feeder     Normally  you will preview and scan one page at a time  Some scan   ners have automatic document feeders  If you choose Automatic  option  you will be able to scan multiple pages at once  However  you  will only be able to preview the first page  If you select Automatic   make sure when you preview the first page that the entire page is  selected and not cropped  Remaining pages will be scanned and fed  without preview checking     3 2 4 Choosing an alternative scanning interface    If your scanner does not respond to the Scan command in the Smart   Score interface or your scanned image is unacceptable  partially  scanned  grey  color  etc         a  Check that your scanner is on and that the proper driver is  installed  File  gt  Scan Music  gt  Select Scanner   If a compatible  driver is not present  you will have to reinstall your scanner   s  software either from the original CD or by downloading the most  recent scanner driver from your scanner manufacturer   s web site   If the above is true and pushing the Scan button in the Navigator  still causes problems  your TWAIN driver is probably incompati   ble with SmartScore   s own scanning interface     b  Switch to the scanning software that was installed with your  scanner  To do this  go to File  gt  Scan Music  gt  Choose Interface   gt  Your Scanner   s  When y
131. e  or knowingly allow others to do so  You may not  develop passwords or codes or otherwise enable the Save feature for equipment that is  not authorized for use with SmartScore  SmartScore and its documentation may not  be sublicensed and may not be transferred without the prior written consent of  Musitek     SmartScore is licensed to be used on only one computer platform at a time  You may  not make copies for the purpose of installing SmartScore on additional computer plat   forms even if at the same location  The only copies authorized in your license agree   ment with Musitek are to be for archival purposes only  Only you  your employees  and consultants who have agreed to the above restrictions may use SmartScore     Your right to copy SmartScore and this manual is restricted by international copyright  laws  Making copies  adaptations or compilation works without prior written consent  of Musitek is prohibited by law and constitutes a punishable legal violation     MUSITEK PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION    AS IS    WITHOUT WARRANTY  OF ANY KIND  EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  INCLUDING BUT NOT LIM   ITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  PARTICULAR PURPOSE  Musitek may revise this publication from time to time  without notice  Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or  implied warranties in certain transaction  therefore  this statement may not apply to  you     Using SmartScore 3 was written by  Christopher Newell and edited by Jo
132. e 79  132  mordent   editing 159   playback 212  multiple endings 166    N  navigating around ENF 77  129  Navigator 9  256  NIFF 219  normalize graphical controllers  69  Note 253  notes 132  add to  cluster  80  associated with lyric block 94  beaming 84  changing pitch 83  132  changing values 132  color 82  delete from chord 80  dotted 85  forming chords 80  grace notes 81  horizontal nudging 87  insert  change  amp  delete 79  132  nudging 98  overlap or offset 153  splitting 151  stem direction 85  135  swapping noteheads 153  nudging objects 87  98    O  offset notes 153  OMS 60  optimized systems 18  122  225    P  Page Setup 120  page  creating new 89  Paint Brush 54  Part 251  parts  adding to score 118  147  color mode 150  extracting 115  145  insert or remove from system  226  naming in System Manager 144  re linking   optimized 122  147  removing from score 147  show names in ENF 230  Paste 224  Paste   Replace 224  PDF 221  pedals 39  Percussion clef 107  215  Piano Roll 184  pickup measures 58  67  pitch shift 83  select range 258  selected notes 134  Playback  changing instruments 17  linking parts 121  lock to time 58  tempo 61  transposing 61  with spacebar 14  Playback Console 154  200  polyphonic voices 3  16  Polyphony 254  Port 256  Print Preview 220  Printing 221       262 USING SmartScore    INDEX    Program Change 255  Event List 200  Piano Roll 186  Properties Tool 16  162    Q  quantization 242  Quick Keys 132  Barlines 137  Beam Direction 135  Dot
133. e Press Reorder        102 USING SmartScore    Editing Text and Symbols  To scale guitar fretboard   chord symbols     e From the Scale window  change the size of fretboard symbol  from  2 down to  6  All fretboard and or chord symbols will re   size to this scale     To export  import  reset or clear a GCL library file     e Press File in the Chord Library window    e Export Library will save guitar chord library to a file  Choose  the target directory and or drive to save    e Import Library will load a saved guitar chord library from a  directory and or drive  Locate the  GCL file and push OK to load    e Reset to Default will reload original guitar chord library as ini   tially loaded during installation    e Clear All Chords deletes all current guitar chord library data     SONG M 6 6 Bracketing  BOOK  Use Bracketing to assign braces  grand staff brackets and to join  PIANO  GUTAR selected parts into barline groups in an ENF document   E Sar    i m  JEEN peT   Toad rt Devens  Taka Gap        Cis         eed Fiske byicha      ra j      F   en Carneros  7 Sa  E   2 CE        testy gals coal dha reget Loup                   FIGURE 6   9  Bracketing window  To create braces  grand staff brackets and create barline groups     a  Select Bracketing from Edit menu  Ctrl   B  Cmnd   B Mac         USING SmartScore 103    Editing Text and Symbols      Highlight two or more parts in list to select for grouping     Choose Brace  Grand Staff or Barline Group set and press Set    Sel  
134. e Structure  is a powerful tool that allows  you to create entirely new scores by removing  creating and re linking  parts  By simply dragging links around  you have the ability to remove  parts  extract parts and join individual part scores into multi part    con   ductor    scores  See    Scanning Part Scores  Score Parts     on page 45  for more info     8 4 2 Creating a Conductor   s Score from Part Scores    An EMF file was recognized from 3 part scores  each having one Part  per Score Part   A    Score Part    consists of all the pages of a single  instrument in a part score  Some Score Parts may contain more than  one Part  a piano Score Part has 2 Parts and an organ Score Part has 3  Parts   Let   s view the structure of a part score and then combine all  parts into one document     To view score hierarchy  amp  create a conductor   s score from score parts   a  Select Edit  gt  Score Structure     Senoi aihuclune    EKF iinet    ait   Foes   fees   Remi a     a ETE Coreet_     Drap k dug bo morja o eet   Cll   Cl er Sh   Clic toe mo  P ci foe offer hcan rarai       FIGURE 8   5  Score Structure  Typical Part Score     b  Click on any Score Part to highlight it and push the Insert button  at the bottom of the window  You will see a blank Score Part  appear              FIGURE 8   6  Inserting new Score Part       124 USING SmartScore    Changing Score Structure    NOTE  Inserting a new ENF Document will work just as well  In  either case  applying the change  Apply to
135. e Tenor line is dis   played in black and the Bass line is displayed in red  SmartScore allows  up to 4 voices per staff  black  V1   red  V2   green  V3  and blue  V4      d  While holding down the Ctrl button  hit the    9    key  This opens  the Playback Console     e  Change MIDI Instrument assignments for PianoR  Voice 1  to  Choir Ahs and PianoR  Voice 2  to Voice Oohs     f  Push the Play button to hear  Press Close to close the console        20 USING SmartScore    Installation and Quick Tour  2 5 1 Extracting Parts using Score Structure  a  From the Edit menu  choose Score Structure   b  Check the Show Voices box to view voices     c  Click to highlight the box titled    PianoL    and push the Remove  button     Add    Airin     upiese    Plast inp  F Srs Ynines Cac       rap i dup hi ede a  Ou   ih ioe ShA o Cia be kian   Fiii obch fie ot hen func eri       FIGURE 2   10  Eliminating a part in Score Structure    d  Now push the Apply to New button  This creates a new ENF  document containing only the soprano and alto voices  The origi   nal file will remain unchanged    e  Press the spacebar to hear only the women   s voices  Now  we will  extract the alto voice and hear it by itself     2 5 2 Extracting Voices in System Manager    a  Hold down Ctrl      M     Cmnd   M for Mac  keys to open the  System Manager  Select the PianoR part by clicking on the black  dot to the left of the part name  Voice Visibility check boxes  become active    b  Uncheck the box under Vo
136. e a unique score  Choosing New MIDI will open a  blank MIDI Overview and Piano Roll for MIDI input     11 9 2 File  gt  Open  Ctrl  O   Cmnd O     Opens File Selection dialog box and lists saved files  A selected file  will be loaded into memory and will display on the screen     11 9 3 File  gt  Close    Cmnd W Mac     Closes all MIDI views  If any changes were made to the MIDI file   option to Save MIDI file  Return to main SmartScore window     11 9 4 File  gt  Save  Ctrl  S   Cmnd S   Writes currently displayed file to the hard disk        USING SmartScore 239    Reference  11 9 5 File  gt  Save As  Opens Windows File Selection dialog box    Save processed or modified MIDI files to hard disk following MIDI  Recording or Editing procedures     Use to save selected files to directory other than the working directory  11 9 6 File  gt  Recent  1 2 3  or 4     Automatically loads one of the last four files accessed by SmartScore   Win   Select any recent files by type  Mac      11 9 7 File  gt  Exit  Quit   Cmnd Q     Exit SmartScore  Save current file  Go to Windows main desktop     11 10 MIDI EDIT Menu  11 10 1 Edit  gt  Undo  Ctrl  Z   Cmnd Z     Reverses the last action you performed  SmartScore has ninety nine  layers of Undo     11 10 2 Edit  gt  Redo  Ctrl  Y   Cmnd Y   Reapplies the last action that has been Undone   11 10 3 Edit  gt  Select  Opens the Select window for defined note selection   11 10 4 Edit  gt  Select All  Ctrl  A  Cmnd A   Selects all MIDI events in 
137. e are no lyrics or text to  recognize     c  Press Begin Recognition button to start the recognition process   Save the recognized ENF file when prompted     d  To listen to GLUCK ENF just press the spacebar   To shift note pitches     e In the flute part of Measure 3  an eighth note of a beamed group  needs to be a pitch higher  While holding the SHIFT button  down  drag the notehead of the first beamed note up from A to B     To quickly delete objects     e Activate the Select tool     O    key   Click and drag to highlight  both the slur and the tie above the staffline in Measure 10  Hit the  Delete key to remove them        To quickly insert ties  dots and accidentals and articulations     a  Ctrl   click on the dotted half note in the previous measure to  Quick select it  Move the mouse pointer to the beginning of Mea   sure 10 and click to insert the dotted half note     NOTE  The    S    key will allow you to toggle the stem direction of  any selected note     b  Hit the    V    to activate ties  Click on the dotted half notes in Mea   sure 9 and again in Measure 10 to insert each tie     NOTE  Right click while inserting a tie  Mac  Ctrl   click  will  reverse the default orientation of its arc     c  There is a spurious dot in the eighth note beam sequence inside  Measure 10  To delete the dot  toggle the    D    key until the cursor  appears as a greyed out dot and arrow  Click on the notehead  with the dot to remove        USING SmartScore 1 5    af    Installation
138. e for the first page score header     d  Press the Page Setup button to change the basic page layout of  your score  See    File  gt  Page Setup    on page 220 for details        8 8 USING SmartScore    Editing Notes and Rests    NOTE  Tempo will set the metronome for display in ENF and for    playback     Sew SmartScore Document    ft Tithe   Urie    MM  E Copom      Pat Hanne      Gpstem Type in Score Pisno    pits  I r    E    Shaves pa Spem    Humber of Sprang  Stat Spening    Sydiem Sparre   Linea Spa  ig    Camia     PE In   Chal Signi Auiomaticaly       FIGURE 5   6  New score window    NOTE  To create an ENF document without clefs  uncheck Insert  Clef Signs Automatically     5 7 2 Using Built in Templates    SmartScore has 15 preset templates including solo instrument  piano   SA   TB score  duet and custom     a  Select a desired template from System Type in Score window     b  Once the score is open  use palettes to select objects and place  them in the score in Insert mode     c  Remember to select File  gt  Save As in order to save the new ENF  file with a name you give to it     TIP  To create a new page once you have reached the bottom of an  ENF page  place your cursor in the last system and hold down  the CTRL button  this    holds    the active system   Select Edit  gt   System  gt  Insert Below  A new page will be created and the  new system will be added to it  Repeat as necessary to create as  many new systems and pages as you require        USING SmartSc
139. e in   Garbage out     You may want to contact Musitek  Tech Support for scanner recommendations     If after examining the image and consulting the Troubleshooting chart   you are still unable to achieve good recognition results  we invite you  to send us your TIFF file s  for detailed analysis by our technicians     You can attach your image  TIFF  files to e mail along with a short  description of the problem you experienced to the following address   tech  musitek com    We will as reply soon as possible  Most likely  we will be able to locate  the problem and offer a solution or recommendation        USING SmartScore 47       Scanning and Recognition       3 9 1 Troubleshooting Scanning and Recognition  Table 3  Troubleshooting Guide  Problem Probable Cause Fix          Scanner does not operate     Scanner drivers not  installed properly     Install TWAIN software  and or scanner Plug in        Scanner not selected in  SmartScore     Ensure proper scanner  driver is selected  File  gt   Scan Music        Scanner not connected or  not turned on     Check cabling and power   Use scan test program        Automatic resolution  returns inconsistent reso   lution choices on the  same page     Music has irregular staff  widths  Scanner may be  distorting regions of    page     Scanner model used does  not support variable DPI   1 pixel increments     Re scan with Resolution  off  Re scan in your  scanner   s software   Select Black  amp  White    350 dpi   TIFF     Re scan with
140. e music if you  are scanning several pages     c  Preset scanner as described in    Scanner settings    on page 29   Push Scan or Final Scan in your scanner   s interface     In this mode  you will preview only the first page in your scanner   s  interface  All subsequent pages are previewed in the Image Processing  window     d  After a page is scanned   the Image Processing window will  open          FIGURE 3   7  Macintosh Image Processing window       36 USING SmartScore    Scanning and Recognition    Refer to the following descriptions of the controls available in the  Image Processing window     e Auto Deskew    Once an image is previewed  toggle this button on and off and choose  the setting that gives you the straightest possible image  If you are  unable to make the image appear straight in the Preview window  repo   sition your music in the scanner and preview again     NOTE  If the preview image appears mostly black  this means your  scanner is reversing image polarity  In this case  you will  want to check the box  Invert Image  next to the Preview  window     e Auto Cropping    The cropping rectangle defines the image area  You may resize by  dragging any side with your mouse  The cropping rectangle should not  intersect or interfere with any part of the music  There is no need to  extend the rectangle beyond your area of interest  SmartScore will  automatically center each page of music to the selected default page  size  Check that the preview image is straight
141. e the Measure   Beat slider and scroll to the desired measure  and beat in the score     To select the MIDI output device    e Use the Port pull down selector   To transpose playback globally    e Use the General Transposition pull down selector   To transpose an individual track   voice     e Use the Transposition pull down selector in any track   voice     10 8 Display Controls    10 8 1 Time    To choose whether the timing of MIDI note events is displayed by Mea   sure  Beat  Tick or by Tick Number        USING SmartScore 20 1    No MIDI  Recording    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    e Go to the Options menu and select Time Format   e Choose by Measure  Beat  Tick or by Tick Number     10 8 2 Velocity    To choose whether the velocity of MIDI note events is displayed with  absolute numbers  0 127  or as percentages     e Go to Velocity Format under the Options menu   e Choose by Value  0 127  or Percent     10 9 MIDI Recording  10 9 1 Recording Options    To activate the Record mode and adjust the recording options choose  Record from the Realtime menu     e Synchro Start    Recording is synchronized to start with the first MIDI note played  To     unsynchronize    the start of recording with the first played MIDI event  uncheck Synchro Start from the Realtime menu OR choose the Met   ronome Settings listed under the Options menu and uncheck Synchro  On     e Thru    Sends new MIDI events to the selected MIDI output device  The active  Piano Roll determines the parameters of
142. ea   Choe eet TD pes hape patia by eke Gerad regis  Dig fat bites Batre Ra a    Coan Sane Sales    The EHF the      FIGURE 3   10  Post recognition System Report    Following recognition  a System Report will be displayed indicating  the number of systems found and on how many pages  Most impor   tantly  it will inform you of the largest and smallest systems including  the number of parts found in each  If any of these structures do not  coincide with the original music  you will want to investigate the cause  before spending a lot of time editing the score    it may be difficult or  even impossible to restructure parts and systems later on     e If you select either Open ENF or Open Super System  the first  thing to be saved is the image file  scanned pages   The Save As   gt  Image window has a field to type in a name for the image file    e Following that  another Save As window will open  This is for  the ENF file  the SmartScore file   It acquires the same name as  was given the image file  It may be changed in the name field   Select a destination directory and press Save to save your new  EMF file    e If you select Open Super System  you will be able to scroll from  system to system and locate any systems containing an incorrect  number of parts  See    System Manager    on page 143 for details       If you select Open Image Editor  you will be taken to the image  editor where you are able to correct certain flaws in the scanned  image  See    Image Editor    on page 
143. easure exactly as written in the ENF display     Uncheck Playback  gt  Lock to Time Signature  Playback will then  sound every measure exactly as notated  If ENF is unedited  you will  probably hear mistakes played back as longer measures or interrupted  passages     4 1 4 MIDI Devices    It is necessary to identify the MIDI device attached to your system in  order for SmartScore to play through it  Selecting the MIDI device is  similar on both Windows   and Macintosh    One nice advantage of the  Mac   Operating System 8 0 and better is that it includes QuickTime     Musical Instruments soft synthesizer  This allows you to select and play  General MIDI  GM  sounds without attaching an external synthesizer  or internal soundcard to your computer     To set the MIDI input and output devices     a  Select MIDI Devices from the Playback menu  The MIDI  Devices window will open          Input  Output   OPL3 SA MPU MIDI IN  Roland Serial MIDI Input OPL3 SA FM MIDI  TTS Virtual Piano In OPL3 S4 MPU MIDI OUT  OPL3 SA Soft Wave Table MI  SONG MIDI Roland Serial MIDI Out Port A    HOOK    FIGURE 4   2  Playback  gt  MIDI Devices    b  Click on the MIDI Output device you wish to use for MIDI  playback  The MIDI device window will display all installed  MIDI device drivers        5 8 USING SmartScore    ENF Playback    c  If you intend to record in SmartScore  select the desired MIDI  mt MIDI recording device interface in Input window     NOTE  Ifthe desired device is not listed in the 
144. eated your own drum pat   tern  Refer to    Creating a drum pattern in ENF    on page 108 for  more information on how to create drum patterns     c  Click MIDI button in the Navigator to open the MIDI Overview   MIDI   NOTE  See Section 10 2 on page 179 for more about MIDI views           USING SmartScore 109    d     e     Working with Drums    Select Edit  gt  Create Automatic Drum Pattern     Create automatic drum track file       Name       Style    Rock       Definition source     Track  All    Begining measure  1    Length  in measures   i SJ    Cancel Generate  gt  gt  gt     FIGURE 7   4  Creating a drum pattern from a MIDI file       Locate the track in which the drum is played and select it in the  Track field  Note that MIDI drums will sound only if they are  assigned to MIDI Channel 10     NOTE  To check the channel number of a track  right click  Ctrl      click for Mac  next to the track number in MIDI Overview  then select Piano Roll  The channel number  and its color   will appear in the upper left corner of the Piano Roll View   Close the Piano Roll window to return to Overview window   Another option is to simply open the Playback Console  Ctrl    9   Next to each track number listing is a colored box con   taining the MIDI channel number assigned     Enter the name you wish to give the pattern in the Name field       Select a musical style to classify the new pattern and enter it in    the Style pull down menu       Locate the first measure where you wish 
145. ecognition Options    on page 38    It  may be necessary to remove incorrectly recognized objects in any case   We recommend this simple    sweep    method following recognition     a  Hit the    O    key to activate the Select tool     b  Click and drag the Select Tool to highlight a group of    false posi   tives    that may be found between staff lines     c  Pay attention to any false tempo and dynamic markings  e g  f  ff   etc   but at the same time  be sure not to select valid markings   notes  chord symbols or other objects you don   t wish to remove     d  Hit the    Delete    key to remove highlighted objects   e  Repeat between subsequent staff lines and on remaining pages     f  See    Inserting or Deleting Multiple Articulations    on page 161        78 USING SmartScore    Editing Notes and Rests  5 3 ENF Editing Modes    5 3 1 Insert and Change modes    NOTE  It is highly recommended that you become familiar with  SmartScore   s hand position for editing  You will find editing  fast and easy once you begin working with this two handed  method          0                         FIGURE 5   1  Left and Right Hand Positions for Editing    Press the    C    key of your computer keyboard to toggle between the  Insert and Change modes  Notice how this changes the appearance of  the cursor  In the Insert mode  the cursor becomes the chosen object  In  the Change mode  the cursor becomes an arrow with the chosen object  next to it  The Change and Insert buttons in the to
146. ed    4 1 1 Quick Play  To play back an open ENF file using the spacebar     a  Press the spacebar to start playback  Press again to pause  Press  again to resume play     oo 99    b  Press the comma key              to rewind to start point     NOTE  Spacebar always refreshes playback according to the current  ENF display  If you wish to keep changes made in MIDI  view  use PLAY button in Mini Console or Playback Con   sole  Ctrl   9   See Section 4 5 12 on page 72 and Section  10 1 1 on page 177 for more details on Refresh MIDI     4 1 2 Mini Console    The Mini Console is free floating if you grab and move it from its  docking position next to Text and Controllers toolbar  It plays  rewinds  and stops playback     The Record button will launch a new MIDI recording session to record  additional tracks  see    MIDI Recording    on page 202   The    spring   loaded    slider will speed up or slow down playback at variable speeds    f and then snap back to the default tempo when let go        nqao      FIGURE 4   1  Mini Console       USING SmartScore 57    ENF Playback    4 1 3 Lock to Time Signature    Playback of the ENF file can be controlled in one of two ways     Lock  to Time Signature    or    play whatever is there     Selecting Lock to  Time Signature will force playback to progress with exactly the same  number of beats   measure as indicated by active Time Signature  This  is the default  For pickup measures  turn Lock to Time Signatures off     To play back each m
147. ed MIDI events can be  moved  when using the mouse or arrow keys to move events horizon   tally     10 9 4 Recording New Tracks   Voices  To Record a new track to a MIDI file     a  Select Record from the Realtime menu OR press the Record  button in the Playback Console  The New View window will  open if any MIDI data already exists in an active file     Track 2  Baar Chal       FIGURE 10   26  Selecting Track to Record       204 USING SmartScore    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    b  Select an existing track to record a new voice within the same  track     NOTE  The new MIDI data will be added to the existing track  without overwriting any material     c  Select New Track to record a brand new MIDI track     NOTE  A Piano Roll will open for the selected track  A Piano Roll  must be open to record in SmartScore  A new voice and MIDI  channel will automatically be created when recording into  any track     d  Use the Playback Console to assign the MIDI parameters for the  new track   voice     e  Press the spacebar or select Play from the Realtime menu  or  press the Play button in the Playback Console to start recording at  measure 1  unless a Punch In point has been set  see below      While recording     e Pause  spacebar  will temporarily halt recording     e Play button  spacebar  will resume recording the same track    voice    e Stop will end the current recording session  SmartScore will  return to the standard MIDI editing environment     10 9 5 External Timer    e To r
148. elected from number keys  Use SHIFT for rests  7 and Ctrl   2 and 3 for accidentals     5 4 3 Grace Notes    While in Insert mode  select a rhythmic value and press the grace note  button in the    Notes    palette  Click before any note in the active staff to  insert a grace note  ENF playback will insert the grace note and trun   cate the duration of either the following or the previous note     To control how grace notes play back and are written to the resulting  MIDI file  go to Playback  gt  Sound Grace Notes     e On the Beat  Accaciatura    Plays on the beat and shortens the  Pi duration of the following note   e Before the Beat   Plays before the beat and shortens the duration  of the preceding note     5 4 4 Select tool     O    key     Use the Select tool to highlight one or more objects for selected editing  functions such as delete  vertically align multi voice notes  split voices   flip stem directions and copy paste  The    O    key activates this tool  Its  button is found in the SmartScore toolbar           USING SmartScore 81    af    EAT  7 Vans      ae  Vaca i  Var d g    Editing Notes and Rests       TIP  Use the Select tool   Delete key to remove any object other  than lyrics and barlines  It is especially useful for removing spu   rious or unwanted text or multiple objects that do not delete eas   ily with the    X    key     5 4 5 Voice color    Contrapuntal voices can be viewed in color as well as in black  To view  contrapuntal voices as separate col
149. ening the ENF file  The Play button in the    Mini Console and Playback Console will NOT activate MIDI  Refresh  Remember  Reopening an ENF file refreshes MIDI        The rule of thumb for saving changed MIDI data is      Perform MIDI Editing Last   Then Save As MIDT             178    USING SmartScore       MIDI Editing and Sequencing    10 1 2 Parts and Voices to Channels and Tracks    SmartScore is designed to map ENF parts and or voices to MIDI tracks  depending on which Color Mode is selected  Part or Voice  For more  about color mode of parts and voices  see    Working with Voices    on  page 62     10 2 Opening  Changing and Closing Multiple MIDI  Views    There are three ways to display MIDI data in the MIDI Editor  Over   view  Piano Roll and Event List     10 2 1 Opening MIDI views    To enter MIDI environment from ENF and to select or change a MIDI  view     a  Press the MIDI button in the Navigator or choose View  gt  New  MIDI View  Ctrl  I   Cmnd I  Mac       The New MIDI View Window will open        FIGURE 10   2  New MIDI View    b  In the Type window  select the type of MIDI view desired  Over   view  display all tracks   Piano Roll  display detail of one track   or Event List  display all MIDI events in all tracks         USING SmartScore 179    MIDI Editing and Sequencing  10 2 2 Changing MIDI Views    The MIDI toolbar  View  gt  Toolbars  gt  MIDI Toolbar  includes but   tons for opening new Overview  Piano Roll  Event List windows  The  Shuttle Tool  Reco
150. ent    When a selected area is moved to the clipboard only the black  portion of the selected area with be moved     11 17 15 Edit  gt  Pen Color    Select the color used by the Brush and Line drawing tools     11 18 Image VIEW Menu  11 18 1 View  gt  Navigator   Opens and closes the SmartScore Navigator   11 18 2 View  gt  Main Toolbar   Opens and closes Main Toolbar  11 18 3 View  gt  SmartScore Toolbar   Opens and closes SmartScore Toolbar  11 18 4 View  gt  Image Toolbar   Opens and closes Image Editing Toolbar  11 18 5 View  gt  Status Bar    Opens and closes Status Bar at the bottom of main SmartScore Win   dow  Displays current page  cursor position  image size  and zoom per   centage     11 18 6 View  gt  Palettes  Opens and closes tool palettes for ENF document editing   11 18 7 View  gt  Image Information    Provides information on the structure and type of the currently dis   played image file        248 USING SmartScore    Reference  11 18 8 View  gt  Next Page  Displays next page of ENF document  11 18 9 View  gt  Previous Page  Displays previous page of ENF document  11 18 10 View  gt  Go to Page  Ctrl  G Win   Cmnd G Mac     Presents a dialog box to select a page number to jump to  Use scroller  to select desired page and click OK     11 18 11 View  gt  Zoom    Lists available view percentages  Changing zoom will affect both the  image and the ENF file simultaneously     11 18 12 View  gt  Window  Opens a second copy of the current ENF document     11 18 13 Vie
151. er value  For example   a triplet of three eighth notes is equal in total duration to one quarter  note    Ties   A tie links two pairs of notes of the same pitch whose durations  are combined so that both notes are played as if one note  Ties are often  used to sustain the sound of a note across more than one measure     NOTE Ties and slurs  legatos  often look alike  but they are as different  as lightning and a lighting bug  Ties connect two notes of the same  pitch and combine their durations into one note event and slurs connect  two or more notes over a range of pitches forming a legato that when  performed  creates a slight overlapping of the notes  The arc of a slur  can vary from flat to angular  The arc of a tie is always flat     Articulations   Performance markings that provide instructions for  playback of the marked notes  For example  a staccato  a dot placed  above  below a notehead  means the note should be short  sounding for  only a moment     Dynamics   Dynamic markings are used to denote the general volume    and intensity of music  For example     f    or forte means loud and    p    or  piano means soft     12 3 Other Notational Terms    Polyphony   The dynamic harmony which evolves as voicelines move  horizontally against one another in time  Polyphony evolved from the  simpler homophony of middle ages where vocal harmony was more  chordal  vertical and static  Polyphony usually refers to the harmonic  relationships between voices but also applies to i
152. erence    11 4 4 Edit  gt  Copy    To Copy selected objects to the clipboard without removing them from  the score     e Click and drag a box with the Select tool  Press Ctrl  C    Cmnd C or go to Edit  gt  Copy     To Copy selected objects to the clipboard without removing them from  the score     e Click and drag a box with the Select tool  Press Ctrl  C    Cmnd C or go to Edit  gt  Copy   11 4 5 Edit  gt  Paste  Ctrl  V   Cmnd V   To Paste the contents of the clipboard into an ENF file     e Select Paste  Ctrl  V  Cmnd V  from the Edit menu and click  anywhere in the score  The contents of the clipboard will be  added to the score without replacing the existing notes        11 4 6 Edit  gt  Paste Replace  Ctrl R or Cmnd R     To Paste the copied material into an ENF file and replace existing  notation     e Select Paste Replace from the Edit menu  Ctrl R or Cmnd R   and click anywhere in the score     TIP  Use Paste Replace to quickly replace a complex passage that  was poorly recognized with an identical passage that is correct     11 4 7 Edit  gt  Select All  Ctrl A or Cmnd A     To select all objects on the current page for cut  copy or paste   replace  action     Choose Select All from the Edit menu  Ctrl A or Cmnd A      11 4 8 Edit  gt  Bracketing  Ctrl B or Cmnd B   Refer to    Bracketing    on page 103     11 4 9 Edit  gt  System Manager  Ctrl M or Cmnd M   Refer to    System Manager    on page 143        224 USING SmartScore    Reference    11 4 10 Edit  gt  Part 
153. ess one of the  Rotate buttons in the Image Toolbar    e Rotate the image Left  90 degree rotation     e Rotate the image Right  90 degree rotation         52 USING SmartScore    Scanning and Recognition    e Select Edit  gt  Rotate  gt  Any to rotate at angles other than 90    degrees   Angle in degrees    Mode Cancel      C Clip image    Expand image         FIGURE 3   18  Image Rotation    e Choose Clip Image mode to maintain the original page size and  orientation of the image file     NOTE  Be careful that none of the image is clipped with this option   If so  choose Edit  gt  Undo  Ctrl   z   Cmnd   z for Mac      e Choose Expand Image mode to increase the page size  if neces   sary  to include the entire image   e Remember to Save when done        Invert    If the image you open in SmartScore is white on black  instead of the  normal black on white   then you should reverse the image output in  your scanning software  SmartScore defaults to 0 white polarity     If your scanned image appears white on black  choose Edit  gt  Invert   3 10 2 Drawing Tools  e Line   Brush Thickness          r    To change the width of brush or line tool  select a new size from the  Width menu in the Image Toolbar  Select from 1 to 50 pixels     e Pen Color       USING SmartScore 53    A     Scanning and Recognition    Toggle the Pen Color push button to choose the color used when draw     ing  Color changes from White to Black as you toggle the button  Or  choose Pen Color from the Edit me
154. ess recording is initiated  To revert back to ENF view   close the open MIDI view     9 4 9 Tiling    Ferg Viewing several displays of your score can be extremely useful  It is  Tie   possible to view several MIDI and ENF views simultaneously        e Push Tile button to display all open TIF ENF views along with  any open MIDI Overview  Piano Roll or Event List views  This  is identical to selecting the Window  gt  Tile menu        Sooo i EA EO Ce ee ee eee  me an  A oe E aa    FIGURE 9   5  Tiled view  typical     9 5 Transposition    SmartScore offers several types of transposition depending on your  needs  You can transpose by key  the most common type of transposi   tion  Transposing by clef is useful for transforming parts to instruments  written in another clef sign  It is also most helpful for rewriting trans   posed instrument parts for other transposed non transposed instru   ments  You can also choose to transpose by altering note pitches only        USING SmartScore 139    Detailed ENF Editing       either considering the active key signature or by ignoring the active key  signature  Using the Limit option  you can choose a specified range   part or voice to transpose     NOTE  It is recommended that you carefully edit your score before  transposing  If your score contains incorrect change of key  signatures and or guitar fret and chord symbols  they will be  transposed to    who knows where     Remember too that it  may become difficult to refer to the original sc
155. every track   11 10 5 Edit  gt  Cut  Ctrl  X   Cmnd X     Removes the highlighted notes from the score and places them in the  clipboard     11 10 6 Edit  gt  Copy  Ctrl  C Win   Cmnd C Mac     Places selected notes on the clipboard without removing them from the  score        240 USING SmartScore    Reference    11 10 7 Edit  gt  Paste  Ctrl  V  Cmnd V     Insert the contents of the clipboard back into the score without deleting  the existing notes     11 10 8 Paste Special    Opens the Paste Special window  The Paste Special window offers sev   eral options for pasting the contents of the clipboard back into the  music     11 10 9 Edit  gt  Delete  Del   Deletes the selected section from the MIDI file     11 10 10 Edit  gt  Program Change  Piano Roll only     Opens the Change Instrument window  Insert a change to a new MIDI  patch     11 10 11 Edit  gt  Velocity  Duration    Opens the Velocity and Duration window  Adjust the Velocity and  or  Duration of the selected MIDI events     11 10 12 Edit  gt  Create Automatic Drum Pattern    If you wish to convert a MIDI drum pattern and add it to the Smart   Score drum pattern library  load the MIDI drum pattern file and select  this option  For more information  see    Adding custom drum patterns  from ENF    on page 109     11 11 MIDI VIEW Menu  11 11 1 View  gt  Navigator    Opens and closes the SmartScore Navigator   11 11 2 View  gt  Main Toolbar   Opens and closes Main Toolbar  11 11 3 View  gt  SmartScore Toolbar    Opens a
156. f signature at the  beginning of a new line     To delete a signature    e With the mouse pointer displaying a key or time signature  hit the     X    key to enter Delete mode and click on the signature     11 2 6 Rhythmic Groups  See    Tuplets and Slurs  Legatos     on page 85     11 2 7 Dynamics   See    To insert a crescendo or decrescendo     on page 158  11 2 8 Tempo   See    Tempo Markings  Metronome Mark     on page 156       21 6 USING SmartScore    L    aff   S0 898 4  E   Sern eeg           Reference  11 2 9 Tools     Text    Selecting the Text button sets the mouse pointer to the Text Edit mode   See  Text   Section 6 1  on page 93     e Lyrics    Selecting the Lyric button sets the mouse pointer to the Lyric Edit  mode  See  Lyrics   Section 6 2  on page 94     e Guitar Fretboard    Selecting the Guitar chord fretboard button set the mouse pointer to     Insert Guitar Chord    mode  See  Guitar Frets and Chord Symbols    Section 6 5  on page 99     e Edit Shapes    Selecting the Edit Shapes button activates Edit Shapes mode  See  Edit  Shapes   Section 6 4  on page 97     e Rehearsal   Ten Rehearsal Markings can be placed anywhere in the ENF view   e Pedals   Four Pedal Markings can be placed anywhere in the ENF view    e Bowings   Two Bowing Markings can be placed anywhere in the ENF view   e Breaths   A Breath Marking can be placed anywhere in the ENF view        USING SmartScore 217    Reference    11 3 ENF FILE Menu    11 3 1 File  gt  New ENF  Ctrl  N Win   
157. for Mac  to insert a tie with upward  arc     d  To delete a tie  hit the    X    key and click the first note of the pair  to delete  You can also use the Select tool and Delete key to  delete ties     NOTE  A tie across a system  tie at end of line  automatically creates  a    linked tie    marking at the end of the source system as well  as to its partner at beginning of the next system        86 USING SmartScore           nM  eS  SS SS E    Editing Notes and Rests  5 4 13 Barlines    While in the Insert mode  hit the    T    key  or select any barline from the     Barlines  amp  Repeats    palette      e Click anywhere in the active staffline to Insert a barline   To Change a barline     a  Select a barline from the    Barlines    palette   b  In Change mode  click on a barline to change to selected barline     c  Press the    X    key and click on the barline to delete it     5 5 Edit Shapes    Detailed features of certain objects can be changed in the    Edit Shapes     mode  Beam angles  lengths and curves of slurs and ties  even horizon   tal and vertical    nudging    of notes and rests are all controlled by drag   ging control points or the objects themselves  To open    Edit Shapes     mode  press the    Edit Shapes    button in the    Text and Controllers     toolbar  To return to normal edit mode  press the    Edit Shapes    button  again  For more information  turn to  Edit Shapes   Section 6 4  on  page 97     5 6 Key and Clef Transposition    Transposing all o
158. g Systems                              121  Re linking optimized systems                        122  Score Structure                                124  Structure and hierarchy                          124  Creating a Conductor   s Score from Part Scores               124  Joining open ENF files                          125  Creating Part Scores from Ensemble Scores                 126  Controlling Voices within Score Structure                     127       114 USING SmartScore    Chapter 8 Changing Score Structure    M FOR PRO and SONGBOOK EDITIONS ONLY  Once you have rec   ognized and edited your music  you now have the ability to reconfigure  Ao au the score  In this chapter we will look at how to change the structure of  your music by extracting and recombining parts  score parts and voices   or creating a conductor   s score from separate parts     8 1 Controlling Structure from the System Manager    8 1 1 Extracting parts using Visibility    In this example  we have recognized a vocal   piano arrangement          P       FIGURE 8   1  Three part score  ENF View   To extract a selected Part from within the System Manager     a  Position your cursor over an ENF system that contains the part  you wish to extract  Hit Ctrl M  Cmnd M for Mac   System  Manager opens     b  Select an instrument template for the parts in Part Name column        Le Shall  Peia L abbr Wie Wida er T iraa i bm See             Corning   isre  Snie      r F ta F   Gma    ii ar j  Bo  T Pai eters wiii
159. g the notehead of the  visiting voice to alter its pitch     Py TIP  Hitting the CapLock button  On  keeps the active staff selected     A until CapLock is pressed again  Off   Use this    Hold Active  Staff    feature before selecting any of the Add or Remove staff  and system functions under the Edit menu   9 8 7 Cross measure beaming    To create a cross measure beam     a  Insert a right beam note and a left beam note on either side of a  barline     b  Use the Select tool to highlight both notes and hit the    B    key     9 8 8 Overlapping or offset noteheads    Two notes in different voices can share the same pitch at the same time    You can choose whether note heads of different voices should overlap   one another or become horizontally offset  To allow overlapping note   heads  check off    Overlap Notes    in the Options   Overlap menu    Playback will not be affected whether note heads are offset or overlap   9 8 9 Swapping positions of offset notes   The relative orientation of offset notes can be swapped if necessary    To swap the horizontal positioning of offset notes     a  Use the Select tool to highlight two offset notes belonging to dif   ferent voices in the same vertical event     b  Hit the    L    key to swap note positions        USING SmartScore 1 5 3    Detailed ENF Editing    9 9 Playback Console  PLATEACK COHSOLE    Ganaa ouse i  xj aja aiibi fja    r      Tisch vios Pai Hari Chi Pai Lk irinareni Gel   Mule Solo kroi   1 H ae ale       B r aff eho
160. ge will do  refer to the  user   s manual of your MIDI device     e Meta Events    Meta Events are MIDI file instructions written to the MIDI file  They  provide information such as file and track headers  SMPTE code   tempo  key and time signatures  etc  and can be added to any MIDI file  using SmartScore   s Event List    10 7 Playback Console    The Playback Console is available in Overview and Piano Roll views  and allows for detailed viewing and control of playback and provides  real time editing of the active MIDI file  Push MIDI in the Navigator       200 USING SmartScore    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    and select Piano Roll or Overview  Push the Playback Console button  in the SmartScore Toolbar or choose Real time  gt  Playback Console   Ctrl  9 Win   Cmnd 9 Mac  to open the Playback Console     NOTE  The console can act as a    window shade     To shrink verti   cally  drag the bottom edge of the console up or down     10 7 1 Adjusting Playback Console Settings  General     e Adjust global playback volume using the General Volume  slider    e Adjust channel volumes using individual Volume sliders    e Use Pan to adjust stereo balance for each channel    e Default resets all MIDI tracks to their original settings    e The Close button will close the Playback Console     e Mute any voice while all others continue to play or Solo a single  voice for playback      Change the MIDI Instrument or Channel of any voice     To play back at a given point in the file     e Us
161. ghted and push Save As   e Select the existing name to over write or type in a new name     3 8 Scanning Part Scores  Score Parts     SmartScore allows you to process and combine scanned pages of solo  parts  duets  trios or quartets and play them back simultaneously  They  may also be recombined into a conductor   s score     TIP  If you are scanning in Score parts for the purpose of joining  solo parts into a conductor   s score  it is recommended not to  recognize text     To scan and combine Score parts into one ENF file        USING SmartScore 45    Scanning and Recognition    a  Scan in all pages for each part  For easiest identification  give a  unique name or number for pages belonging to one part  e g   FluteP1  FluteP2  GuitarP1  GuitarP2  etc     b  In the Begin Recognition window  arrange files in order of parts  then pages  e g  Partl Page1  Partl Page2  Part2 Pagel  etc        FIGURE 3   14  Grouping pages to Score Parts    c  Highlight the first set of pages that make up the first Score Part     d  Push Group to Score Part  In the Part Name window  give the  selected pages belonging to a score part a unique name     e  When all pages are properly grouped to score parts  push the  Begin Recognition button     SmartScore will internally organize score parts following recognition   The ENF window will display pages for the first part followed by pages  of the next part  Parts will play back simultaneously  For more informa   tion on creating conductor   s scores  
162. h     Rest   Rests are equivalent to notes insofar as their durations  but repre   sent silence  They act as       place holders    used to keep the rhythmic  structure of the measure intact     Measure   Staff lines are segmented into equal time divisions called  measures  Measures are the building blocks that provide structure for  music  The sum of note and rest durations within each measure must  equal the value of the current time signature    Barline   Barlines are the vertical lines that define the beginning and  ending of measures    Accidental   Note pitches often range outside of the tonal center  defined by the key signature  An accidental shifts its associated note up   sharp  or down  flat  by 1 2 step  Accidentals may also be doubled  An  accidental remains effective only for the remainder of the measure in  which it appears  A natural    cancels    a note   s current accidental     Dot of Prolongation   Notes and rests that are dotted have the value of  their duration lengthened by 1 2  For example  a dotted quarter note is  equal in duration to three eighth notes  Double dotted notes increase  the note   s duration by 3 4 of the original        USING SmartScore 253    Glossary       Tuplet   Some notes belong to a special readmit class called       tuplets      These include triplets  quintuplets and sextuplets  A tuplet is a group of  notes  usually marked with a bracket  that are subdivided within a sin   gle beat  equal in duration to the note   s next high
163. h    class    that stave belongs to  The lowest instruments are written  in the bass clef  intermediate instruments and voices often use one of  three    C    clef classes while higher pitched instruments  in addition to  the right hand part of a piano score  are scored in the treble clef  The  clef sign always appears at the beginning of every staff line and in the  first measure if a change of clef occurs  Change of clef signs are smaller  than normal clefs        252 USING SmartScore    Glossary    Key Signature   The key signature  along with the clef sign  appears at  the beginning of every line  it is also found in the measure where a  change of key occurs  The key signature defines the    tonal center    of  the piece  The number of sharps or flats in the key signature determines  the key tone  or tonic      Time Signature   Time signatures usually appear only once  at the  beginning of the stave in the first measure of the piece  They will also  appear when a change of time signature occurs  Time signatures indi   cate both the number of beats per measure  numerator  as well as which  note value is given the fundamental beat  denominator   The sum of  note duration values in a given measure must equal the value of the cur   rent time signature     Note   A note is the fundamental unit of tone  The duration of a note is  determined by its note value  normally between 1 and 128 divisions    The note   s vertical position on a given staff  with clef  determines its  pitc
164. h  software that enable programs such as SmartScore to control them   TWAIN drivers and or Mac plug ins are normally included in the soft   ware packaged with most scanners  It may be necessary for some users  to perform    Custom  gt  Install TWAIN    from the CD which was  included with your scanner  depending on the manufacturer     NOTE  Scanner drivers are often updated by scanner manufacturers  and posted on their web sites  If problems occur during scan   ning  it is always a good idea to check the Internet for updated  scanner drivers before calling Musitek Technical Support     Mac Only  Skip the next section  Turn to     Scanning for Macintosh      on page 32     3 2 Scanning in Windows       a  Check File  gt  Scan Music  gt  Choose Interface   SmartScore   s     b  Go to File  gt  Scan Music  gt  Select Scanner  With your mouse     click on the driver that corresponds to your scanner   fix       FIGURE 3   1  File  gt  Scan Music  gt  Select Scanner    NOTE   Win XP   and NT   only   Select    WIA xxxx xxxx    if avail   able  Do not select    PrecisionScan          etc  when WIA driver  is available  For Win 98   or 2000      see    HP    on page 31        USING SmartScore 25    Scanning and Recognition    If you do not see anything listed in the Select Scanner window  your  drivers are probably not installed  Install or replace TWAIN driver  from scanner CD or from the    Download Drivers    area of scanner  manufacturer   s website  If the scanner still does no
165. hanging Parts and MIDI instruments in System    Manager    We will now use System Manager to select parts and assign MIDI  sounds  MIDI instrument assignments can be changed in the System  Manager either by choosing one of a number of preset Part Names or  by changing the MIDI instruments assigned to any particular voice     a     d     Return to the original Gluck score  hit Ctrl   M   Cmnd   M  Go  to the Part Name column and click on the first Part Name   Flute  Scroll down the list and select Oboe  Notice Voice 1  becomes Oboe  NOTE  Default instrument names and linked  MIDI sounds are obtained from Instrument Templates        Lre Sisi i  PatMere    abi aai Yous Z Wooo 3    ton    Epe Epe dah aad       FIGURE 2   8  Changing MIDI instruments by selecting new Part Name      Even more interesting is to assign different instrument sounds to    contrapuntal voices within a single part  staff line   Refer to the  next figure  Changing MIDI Instrument of a voice in System  Manager     Select Harpsichord instrument for Voice 2 of the PianoR part   Each voice  V1  V2  V3 or V4  can each be assigned a unique  MIDI sound simply by clicking on its current instrument name  and selecting one of 128 MIDI instruments           2a E i    E 5 Taw   FIGURE 2   9  Changing MIDI instrument of a voice in System Manager    Press OK to apply the change and close System Manager        USING SmartScore 19    Installation and Quick Tour    e  Now hit the spacebar to play back  Whenever the seconda
166. hannel  MIDI Channel 10  is the default  channel  But you can change it if you wish     Determine the number of Lead in Measures that will play prior to the  start of recording  The metronome will click at each baseline beat   derived from the time signature  for as many measures as you choose     The Primary Beat  down beat  will sound when its On check box is  selected  The Pitch pull down menu displays all General MIDI drum  sounds  Use the Volume scroll box to increase or decrease the volume  of the Primary Beat  The default accents the Primary Beat        USING SmartScore 203    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    The Secondary Beat will sound when it On check box is selected  The  Pitch pull down menu displays all General MIDI drum sounds  Use the  Volume scroll box to increase or decrease the volume of the Secondary  Beat     10 9 3 Snap to    MIDI recording is very strict  Any fluctuation in timing or speed may  result in strange or even useless notation  To prevent this  you can  apply quantization to your performance  Select Snap to from the  Options menu prior to recording  Choose the smallest rhythmic value  that you think you can accurately play while recording  The resulting  MIDI events will be justified  each event beginning at the nearest  selected rhythmic timing mark     You can reset start times of selected events to the nearest value set in  Options  gt  Snap to will also reset start times of all selected MIDI  events and will fix the increment at which select
167. hapter 8  Changing Score Structure                115  Controlling Structure from the System Manager                 115  Page Setup                               120  Re link Parts                              121  Merging Systems                            121  Re linking optimized systems                       122  Score Structure                              124  Structure and hierarchy                        124  Creating a Conductor   s Score from Part Scores               124  Joining open ENF files                        125  Creating Part Scores from Ensemble Scores                 126  Controlling Voices within Score Structure                   127  Chapter 9  Detailed ENF Editing                     129  More ENF navigating                           129  Quick Keys                              132  QuickSelect  Ctrl   Click                    132  Insert and Change Modes  C                      132  Delete by Group   Delete Any  X                      133  Select Tool  O                              133  Using the Select tool for quick deletions                     133  Using the Select Tool  O  to edit selected objects             134  Dots  D                              134  Ties  V                             135  Beam direction  A                           135  Flags and beams  F                         135  Stem direction  S                        135  Accidentals                          136  Rests  R                                137  Barlines  I          
168. hen done     Pisce ee i noe    Hebs ol pig comet 1    FIGURE 3   4  Scan Next Page   Finish window       NOTE  Before selecting Next Page place the next page into the scan   ner and wait until the scanner bar resets  If you push too soon   you may get an error message that    Scanner cannot be  found     or    Scanner is not ready        NOTE  If the piece you are processing exceeds 24 pages  divide it  into smaller  discrete sections  e g  Intro  Part1  Part2  etc     The following section lists image enhancement and scanner settings  which you can control within the SmartScore scanning interface  If you  understand and or accept the default settings in the Scan window  turn  to    Recognition Sequence  Win   Mac     on page 37 to complete scan   ning and to begin the recognition process     3 2 2 Automatic image enhancement functions    The SmartScore interface has 4 automatic image enhancement func   tions all designed to assist you in creating the best possible image for  recognition        USING SmartScore 27    Scanning and Recognition          Auto Resolution    This feature takes the guesswork out of choosing the correct resolution   dpi  setting for each scan  When selected  the image is analyzed and  sized in order to obtain an optimum image resolution  thus achieving  the highest possible recognition accuracy  Use this feature whenever  possible     e Auto Cropping    The cropping rectangle defines the final image area  You may change  its size by dragging any edge
169. hods make SmartScore the most accu   rate music reading software ever  This means you will spend less time     cleaning up    recognized files  Version 3 has greatly improved nota   tion  text and lyric recognition  Guitar fretboard and chord symbols   triplets  both noted and implied   arpeggios  glissandos  accents  multi   ple endings  tempo  pedal and bowing markings are now recognized     1 3 2 New tools to enhance your experience    Improved editing functions include smarter beaming including group   ing of selected notes into beams and cross measure beaming  Apply  changes to articulation and dynamic markings individually or globally   The Guitar Chord Library now contains more than 500 chords  Play   back your SmartScore files with automatic drum tracks  Choose from a  library of drum styles and even add your own  A new Karaoke View  lets you sing along with    bouncing ball    and moving lyrics  Immedi   ately add drum tracks based on various styles     1 3 3 Enhanced ENF to MIDI relationship    Unlike most MIDI sequencing programs which support only one MIDI  channel per part  Type 1 format   SmartScore supports multiple MIDI  channels within each MIDI track  This is because SmartScore can dif   ferentiate more than one voice within a part  When Option  gt  Color    Voice  contrapuntal voices become assigned to individual MIDI       USING SmartScore 3    Introduction to SmartScore    channels  In practice  this level of detail creates a world of possibilities  for e
170. hout a score  the ability to apply different  characteristics to them  to control their visibility and spacing on the  page  etc  gives SmartScore its unique flexibility  The usefulness of  these relationships becomes most apparent in the System Manager   where instrumental characteristics are assigned     1 4 How to use this manual    An excellent way to start using SmartScore is to turn to the Quick  Tour on page 9  As you scan  recognize  play back and edit your files   turn to the corresponding chapter in this manual  Later chapters will  help you to work with text and symbols  to change the structure of your  score  to do more detailed editing and to operate in a pure MIDI envi   ronment     This manual is fully indexed and cross referenced  The easiest and  quickest method of obtaining information on any topic is to look it up  in the Index on page 258 then turn to listed page s   Detailed descrip   tions of SmartScore menu items can be found in Reference chapter on  page 211        USING SmartScore 5    GUITAR    MIDI    Me    Introduction to SmartScore    1 4 1 What Edition symbols mean    This manual is written for all editions of SmartScore  Features  described that do not apply to all editions will have a symbol in the left  margin     e SmartScore Full Edition  No restrictions   e Songbook Edition  Not found in MIDI  Piano or Guitar Edi   tions     Identical to SmartScore Full Edition but limited to processing music  with no more than 3 staves per system     e Pia
171. hs eos Sere eae ee eee E 186  Inserting program changes  Assign MIDI instrument         186  MIDI Instrument settings                         187  MIDI event selection                          189  Changing MIDI event characteristics                 190  Note Event window                       191  Cut Copy and Paste                          192  Measure Settings                             193  Setting Repeats and Multiple Endings                195  Segnos                             195  Event List 24 22  2el ee SS ee eS be    Se lhe 197  Changing parameters of selected notes              198  Inserting note events                        198  Editing Key  Time and Tempo                   199  Inserting Non Note Events                      199  Playback Console         63 5 24 ee ee ee ek 200  Display Controls                             201  MIDI Recording                           202  Step Time Recording                             206  Virtual Drum Kits               57 77 577    5 207  Playback Considerations after MIDI Editing                       208  MIDLENE    ee erat Bre Ss Stee ee oe ee ee E 208  Saving MIDI Files                           208       176 USING SmartScore    Chapter 10 MIDI Editing and  Sequencing    10 1 ENF Notation and MIDI Editor Relationship    10 1 1 Updating and refreshing playback and display    It   s important to understand the difference between the ENF and MIDI  displays  ENF notation always updates the MIDI display  But the MIDI  disp
172. i   tion Selector  The solid line represents the fret position     e Press Copy to copy the current fretboard to the clipboard   e Press Paste to paste in the fretboard layout from the clipboard     Press Add  The newly created chord and symbol will be written to the  library  You will be warned if a symbol with the exact chord label  already exists  If so  push Done  rename the chord and Add again     To change an existing chord or symbol in the Guitar Chord Library     a  Push the Change button in the Library section of chord window     b  Proceed to edit chord symbol as described above  When finished   press OK in Frets window  Chord symbol is automatically  updated     NOTE  You can page through symbols using either the scroller or  clicking through the    index    window in bottom right corner     To delete existing chord symbol s         In Delete mode     X    key   click on any symbol to delete it   To delete several fret symbols  use the Select tool  highlight as  many frets on one line that you wish and hit the Delete key     To move a chord symbol vertically  Hold the Shift button and click and drag a chord symbol up or down   To move one or more chord symbols     a  Use the Select tool     O    key  and highlight more than one guitar  fretboard   chord symbol above a staff line     b  Push the Edit Shapes button in the Text and Controllers toolbar   c  Use your mouse to click and drag fretboard chord symbols   To reorder all chords based on alphabetical order     
173. ic is encompassed  Do not cut off  any margins as they determine score structure  Try to leave about  1 4    to 1 2    of white space on all sides of the music  Press down  hard on the spine if you are using a book     d  Find the controls for Resolution  dpi  and Darkness   Bright   ness in your scanner   s interface  It may take some poking around     3 4 5 Scanner settings    e Resolution    Select a resolution of 300 350 dpi for most music  If the original music  is printed in smaller type  increase resolution to 400 500 dpi  For min   iature scores  try 600 dpi  but don   t expect miracles if the music has  extremely small print  It is not recommended you scan music below  250 dpi or higher than 600 dpi  If the resolution you selected is too high  or too low  you will receive a message at the beginning of the recogni   tion sequence recommending another resolution  You will have to  choice to    Continue    or    Rescan        e Darkness   Brightness    For typical printed music  scan slightly darker than    0    setting  e g     10   This tends to    fatten up    objects  If the original music is faded  if it  is a weak copy or if it has become degraded  you may want to scan even  darker  e g   10  or  15    If beams smear together and whole and  half notes appear closed or    blobbed        then brighten the scan  e g    15    SmartScore wants to see solid  well defined lines that are nei   ther razor thin nor smeared together     a  Once set  press the Scan or Final S
174. ice 1 to make the soprano part invisi   ble  In the Apply region below  check the Visibility box since the  only change we are making in the System Manager is to visibil   ity    c  Press Apply to New to create a new ENF document containing  only the alto voiceline     d  Press the spacebar to hear just the alto line       Editing Lyrics and Text  Mo sb a  Select Recognition     USING SmartScore 21       ue     Installation and Quick Tour    b  Press the Add Files to List button in the Begin Recognition win   dow  Select SONGBOOK TIF and press Open  In the Options  area  check the box to the left of Text Recognition  Change Lan   guage to English     c  Press the Begin Recognition button  Once Recognition is com   plete  save the ENF file  SONGBOOK ENF     d  The lyrics in the first system appear too close to the arcing slur in  the right hand piano part     e  With Shift button down  click and drag the first set of lyrics up     f  Press the L  Lyric  button in the Text and Controllers toolbar   With the lyric cursor activated  click on half note in the top staff  line  The cursor will insert at the beginning of the lyric block  associated with that note     g  Using the arrow keys  move the cursor down to the next lyric line  and then right to the end of the lyric block  Hit         to insert it     h  Repeat in Measure 8 by clicking on the topmost dotted half note     2 7 Editing Solo Guitar Music   MIDI View    2 7 1 Editing three or more voices    Solo classical guitar a
175. icking inside any of the diplays opens a navigation aid or  zoom window     11 5 2 View  gt  Palettes  Refer to page 130   Tool Palettes  F1 F9 keys   for details        USING SmartScore 229    Reference    11 5 3 View  gt  Open at Startup    When this option is active  Toolbars and Palettes that are checked will  open by default when SmartScore is launched  Use to override default  toolbar and palette displays     11 5 4 View  gt  Show Active Staff    This selection will cause the ENF display to highlight the active staff in  black while other staves become grey  The active staffline is the staff  that the mouse pointer was last positioned over     TIP  Show Active Staff is useful when notation objects do not  respond to editing actions  Using this view option might reveal  that they actually belong to an adjacent staffline     TIP  If an object does not delete even if it shows itself to be in an  active staff  use the Select tool     O    key  to highlight it and  then hit Delete  All selected objects will be removed with the  Delete key  whether they are in the active staff or not     11 5 5 View  gt  Hidden Symbols  Refer to page 155   Hidden Symbols  for details     11 5 6 View  gt  Break Barline    Choose this option to break barlines by instrument groups  For more  details  see page 224   Edit  gt  Bracketing  Ctrl B or Cmnd B      11 5 7 View  gt  Cross staff Voicing    Choose solid or dashed line to indicate when a voice crosses over to an  adjacent staff line     vi
176. ickly check for errors  select Error Check  Ctrl      E         2 3 3 Editing Fandango  To insert the missing grace note in the first measure     a  Move your cursor to the    Notes    tool palette on the left of your  screen  Select a 16th note  The number    5    key on your computer  keyboard will do the same   Hit the    C    key and toggle to Insert  mode  displaying only a note   In both Insert and Change  modes  your cursor becomes the selected object     b  Press the    A    key to change the beam direction until it points  towards the right  In the    Notes    palette  click on the    Grace  note    button  Move your cursor into Measure 1 and position the  notehead of the grace note on D  Press the    S    key to flip its stem  direction  Click to insert the first grace note  Notice the cursor   s  beam direction has gone from right to left  Position the cursor  notehead on F and click to insert the second grace note  See     Insert and Change Modes  C     on page 132     NOTE  Grace notes can play back either on the beat  accaciatura  or  before the beat  To change  go to Playback  gt  Sound Grace  Notes     TIP  The    FT    key will reset all windows and palettes to their default    positions  This is especially useful when windows  palettes and  tool bars become too scattered or too numerous     To insert the missing dynamic markings     a  Move your cursor over any tool palette on the left side of your  screen and right click  Win    Ctrl   click  Mac   This all
177. idual note   s parameters  Channel  Time  Duration   Pitch  and Velocity     10 6 2 Inserting note events    To insert new events in the Event List view     a     onan p    Click the Event you want the Note to follow  Select New from  the upper left hand corner of the Event List  The Create New  Event window will open       Scroll to Note On in the Event Type menu     Press OK     A Note On event will be inserted into the Event List       Enter the Voice  Time  Duration  and Pitch of the new event by    clicking in the corresponding columns or double click in the  Type column to open the Note On window        198    USING SmartScore    MIDI Editing and Sequencing  10 6 3 Editing Key  Time and Tempo    Click in any column to make changes to any existing MIDI events  To  insert a new tempo  key  or time signature click the event you want the  new event to follow  Press the New button  The Create New Event win   dow will open     Create New Event x     Event Type      M eta Event    Control Change  Program Change  Channel Presure  Pitch Bend Change                Tempo    SMPTE Offset    Time Signature    Key Signature     Sequencer Specyfic            FIGURE 10   24  Create New Event window    Use the scroll bar to select Meta Event  A Meta Event is a MIDI file  instruction  Scroll through the Event Subtype window to choose  Tempo  Time Signature  or Key Signature  Press OK  Use the Other  column to select the new tempo  time signature  or key signature OR  double click in the 
178. iew selected track in one of these views     NOTE  The Transpose selection window will actually move all the  note events of the selected track by half steps     e New Track will create an empty new track    e Selecting Duplicate Track will create an exact copy of the active  track and insert it at the bottom of the track listing    e Delete Track will erase the highlighted MIDI track completely     To zoom in and out in Overview and Piano Roll     e Use the magnifying glass in the MIDI toolbar  Click to zoom in   Right click  option   click for Mac  to zoom out    e Drag zoom will magnify events either horizontally or vertically   To zoom vertically  drag any piano key divider  Piano Roll  or  track divider  Overview  upwards or downwards  To magnify  events horizontally  drag a measure bar division in the track  header left or right            FIGURE 10   6  Drag Zoom in Piano Roll and Overview          USING SmartScore 181    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    10 4 Playback    10 4 1 Spacebar    e Press the spacebar to Play  Press again to Pause  Press again to  resume Play  Press the comma key           to Rewind to the begin   ning     10 4 2 Mini Console      mp  The Mini Console is a dockable  tear off  toolbar that plays  records   rewinds and stops playback     ido a Hra Connais  oso  No MIDI  Recording The    spring loaded    tempo slider will increase or decrease tempo    speed depending on the distance it is pulled from the center  Releasing  the mouse will return pla
179. ight beam    selected  clicking to the left of an  existing beamed group will insert a note to the beginning of that    group        84 USING SmartScore    Editing Notes and Rests  5 4 9 Stem direction    The default stem direction of an inserted note is determined by its verti   cal position on the staff  When your cursor crosses the middle staffline   the direction of the stem automatically switches  Default stem direc   tions  Up above the middle staff line  Down below the middle staff line     To reverse the default stem direction while inserting a note     e With a stemmed note selected  toggle the    S    key to change its  default stem direction  Another method is to insert the note with a  right click  option   click for Mac   This will reverse the default  stem direction of the note as it is displayed by the cursor     To change the stem direction of an existing note   a  Toggle the    C    key to activate the Change mode   b  Right click  option   click for Mac  on any given notehead  The    stem direction will change     5 4 10 Dots of Prolongation    e Select the    D    key  dot or double dot from the    Notes    or    Rests     palette  Click on any notehead to attach a dot of prolongation     e To Delete a dot of prolongation  press the    D    key again and  click on the notehead     5 4 11 Tuplets and Slurs  Legatos     While in the Insert mode  select a triplet     T    key  from the    Rhyth   mic Groups    palette or select Legato from the    Articulations
180. ime  set the   of Passes to 2  the default      Check the Last Measure of Repeat box to set a measure as the final  measure of the repeated section  During playback  once the preset num   ber of passes has been met  playback of the remainder of the score will  continue after this measure has finished     The 1  Measure of Ending box designates a measure as the beginning  of an ending     The Number of Passes scroller is used to number this ending  i e  1    1  Ending  2   2  Ending  Hold down the Ctrl key to select a number  to designate the number multiple passes this ending should have     Use the Last Measure of Ending check box to define the total length  of the ending  After this measure is played  MIDI playback will jump to  the 1  Measure of Repeat and continue on with the next pass     NOTE  This measure is also the Last Measure of Repeat  Check the  Last Measure of Repeat box to continue playback with the Ist  Measure of Repeat     10 5 12 Segnos    A Segno is a musical notation symbol used to denote the beginning or  the end of a repeated section     e Starting from a Segno    Checking the Segno box will place a Segno in a measure        USING SmartScore 195    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    Activate the Jump check box and select d s  or Dal Segno  from  Segno   After this measure is played  MIDI playback will jump to the  Segno measure and continue playback     e Ending at a Segno    Check the Jump box and select d c  or Da Capo  from the beginning   and al segno  
181. indow     11 16 Image File Menu Items    11 16 1 File  gt  New    Select between a new ENF or a new MIDI  Choosing New ENF will  open the New SmartScore Document window  Select a Template or use  Custom to create a unique score  Choosing New MIDI will open a  blank MIDI Overview and Piano Roll for MIDI input     11 16 2 File  gt  Open  Ctrl  O   Cmnd O     Opens File Selection dialog box and lists saved files  A selected file  will be loaded into memory and will display on the screen     11 16 3 File  gt  Save  Ctrl  S   Cmnd T   Writes currently displayed file to the hard disk        USING SmartScore 245    Reference  11 16 4 File  gt  Save As  Opens Windows File Selection dialog box    Save processed or modified Image files to hard disk following Scan   ning and Editing  Use to save selected files to directory other than the  working directory     11 16 5 File  gt  Scan Music   Selects scanner or initiates scanner to acquire image   11 16 6 File  gt  Recognition   Initiates Recognition to begin processing saved image file s    11 16 7 File  gt  Print  Ctrl  P Win   Cmnd P Mac     Initiates Windows Print Monitor  Current Image file is output to default  printer from selected printer port     11 16 8 File  gt  Recent  1 2 3  or 4     Automatically loads one of the last four files accessed by SmartScore   Win   Select any recent files by type  Mac     11 16 9 File  gt  Exit  Quit  Cmnd Q Mac     Exit SmartScore  Save current file  Go to Windows main desktop     11 17 Image EDI
182. ing a choral or orchestral score that  has dissimilar lines of lyrics written under every staff line  including the  last staff line of each system  Otherwise  leave unchecked     e Triplets    Check this box if the score contains triplets that are indicated with the  number    3    along with an arc or bracket     e Implied Triplets    Check this box if the score has repeated groups of three beamed notes   except for scores with    tripled time    signatures  x 3  x 6  etc    The  first grouping is usually indicated with a triplet marking  For the sake of  convenience implied triplets are not repeated again     e Endings  If the music has more than one ending indicated  check this box     e Pedals    If pedal markings are written into the music  check this box        USING SmartScore 39    Scanning and Recognition       e Bowings  If up down bowing marks are written into the music  check this box   e Hymnal Fonts    If you are scanning in music from a hymnal  with stubby flags and short  stems   check this box     e Join Offset Voices    Often you will see notes belonging to different voices appear horizon   tally offset  even though they sound at the same time  It is necessary for  the recognizer to decide which notes to join and which notes not to join  to a    vertical event     See    Vertical Alignment and offset voices    on  page 64   Normally  offset notes belonging to different voices have no  more than 1 4 of a notehead   s space between them     e If your music ha
183. ing program like Photo   shop   to scan and save images  Then Recognize the saved images in  SmartScore  This is the least desirable choice  You will get more reli   able results if you scan from within SmartScore        42 USING SmartScore    Scanning and Recognition    If you are going to scan outside of SmartScore  use the following  guidelines for successful music scanning     3 7    Place music in the scanner as straight as possible    Set Output or Purpose to Black  amp  White  Line Art  1 bit or OCR    not color or gray  Do not select    Color    or    Photo       Set Resolution to 300 400 dpi for average printed music    Set Darkness to  10 or  15  for average printed music    Save as TIFF file  Uncompressed will be about 1 MB per page    Compressed files are smaller  BMP will work too  Use a unique   filename for each page    e g  Pagel tif  Page2 tif  etc   Optimum resolution is achieved when the distance between  staff lines is about 20 pixels  Zoom into the image  Referring to  the mouse position readout in the status bar  measure the dis   tance between two lines in a stave  measure white space only      Selecting Pre scanned Files for Processing    NOTE  For detailed information on proper scanning procedures  see       Scanner settings    on page 35     To create an ENF file from pre scanned images of printed music     a     Push the Recognition button on the Navigator or select Recog   nize under the File menu     dja   eee O  Open ScanfRecog   Unily Score Reco
184. ion and define on which pass playback  will jump     10 6 Event List    To view and edit detailed MIDI events  meta events  note events  con   trollers  program changes  key and time signatures  etc  in a selected  track     a  Press the MIDI button of the Navigator or in the menu  select  View  gt  New MIDI View or Window  gt  Event List     b  Choose Event List from the Type pull down menu    c  Select a track to view and press OK     The Event List displays every MIDI event of the selected track     Beet R  1   es    i Pr     ij a  F Emi em piera  E masii m heie p b P He F ia i                FIGURE 10   22  Event List    e Select what event types are displayed in the Event List by check   ing or un checking the Event Type boxes along the top of the  Event List    e To scroll the Event List display during playback  check the     Scroll when playing    box in the Event List window        USING SmartScore 197    mo      MIDI Editing and Sequencing    To page from track to track  click on Track Paging buttons in the  Main Toolbar     10 6 1 Changing parameters of selected notes    To change parameters of a group of selected notes     Click in any of the columns to change the parameters of an exist   ing MIDI event or double click in the Type column of a Note  Event to open the Note On window        Channel Time   E E   Duration Pitch   p g ea   Velocity       FIGURE 10   23  Note On window    The Note On window  like the Note Event window  allows for adjust   ment of an indiv
185. irst ending and stages the cursor to enter  another  second  ending section     To create a second or third ending     d  Select the Start Alternate Ending button  Select the number of  repeats and click the barline of the first measure of the second  ending  usually the same repeat barline that ends the first end   ing     e  Click the last barline to close out the second ending        1 66 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing  f  Repeat above steps as necessary for subsequent endings     NOTE  If the last barline is not a repeat ending  it can be changed   Choose an appropriate barline from the    Barlines and  Repeats    palette and Change the barline type     9 14 3 Working with the Coda    A Coda sign marks the conclusion of a piece  A Coda is generally used  Kia rs to repeat a theme or variation outside repeated endings     To mark the beginning of a Coda and to insert a    jump to Coda    sign     a  Select Coda sign from the    Barlines and Repeats    palette  In  Insert mode  click on the barline where the coda is to begin  usu   ally at the end of a repeated section or numbered ending     b  Select the To Coda sign and in Insert mode  find the point in the  last passage or ending where playback is to    jump    to the Coda  and click the barline where the jump is to occur     NOTE  The Coda will not be played back until it is activated by the  To Coda or d s  al Coda sign     9 14 4 Working with the Segno    SS Segno means    sign     It marks the beginning of a
186. king with 107  Dynamics 254    playback 14  57  preliminary cleanup 78  Save as PDF 221  saving and exporting 90  Score Header 227  scrolling 130   Select area 90   set play range 71  Status Bar 78   System Manager 143  Templates 89       USING SmartScore 259    tempo marking 227   to CD 222   Zoom 77  181  185  ENF   MIDI   relationship 177   remove articulations 91  ENF Menu Items 218  ENF playback 57   real time settings 62  Ensemble 251   creating part scores from 126  Error Check 61  83  expanded systems 122  exporting ENF files 90  Extended Notation Format 10  extracting   voices 21  extracting parts and voices   Apply New 146    F   fermata   editing 159   playback 211  FILE menu 218  Finale   exporting to 91  Fine 168  flagged notes   beaming 134  Folio 252  fonts  changing styles 96  Format Score 227    G  glissando 161  Go to    130  grace notes 81    INDEX    Graphical Controllers  ENF 69  MIDI 185   guitar frets  amp  chord symbols  display 231  editing and adding 101  inserting 99  moving 102  recognizing 40  scaling 103   guitar  tutorial 22    H   hairpin   inserting 158   properties 162  Help menu 238  Hewlett Packard scanners 31  Hidden Symbols 155  235  horizontal nudging 97  horizontal reformatting 98    I   image background 55  Image Editor 50   Cut  Copy and Paste 55   image info 50   pen options 53  indent  first system 120  Insert mode 12  Insert  Change toggle 79  132  inserting new systems 225  Installation 9  Instrument Templates 73  147  instrument 
187. l down menu  Same as File  gt  Open     9 4 2 Scan    iw       Scan   Push to initiate scanning  Same as File  gt  Scan Music  gt  Acquire   9 4 3 Recognition  Recog   Push to initiate recognition on any pre scanned image  Same as File  gt        Recognize     9 4 4 Unify  U     Push to initiate Unify Key  Time and Clefs  Same as Edit  gt  Unify Sig   natures  See    Unify Key  Time and Clefs  U     on page 169 for details     Unify    9 4 5 Score    2     Scoe   Push to create ENF score from scratch  Choose ENF score template    from    System Type in Score    pull down menu  Same as File  gt  New  gt   New ENF  See    Creating a New ENF Score from Scratch    on page 88  for details        9 4 6 Record    Push Record button to initiate MIDI Recording  All open ENF docu   ments are closed when MIDI recording is launched  A MIDI Piano Roll  W Wl  view opens with Track 1 staged for MIDI recording through an external  M Me MIDI device  Identical to Realtime  gt  Record in MIDI View        Record  Sme  alk    9 4 7 Karaoke View   2  Push to enter Karaoke playback environment   Hola    9 4 8 MIDI View  Ctrl   I   Cmnd   I for Mac     mo ui Push MIDI button to view score in MIDI environment  Use also to  change from one MIDI view to another  e g  to change from Overview  M sa to Piano Roll view  Choose Overview or Piano Roll or Event List for a       1 3 8 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing    selected Part  Same as View  gt  New MIDI View  ENF view remains  open until or unl
188. l under certain circumstances     e For smoothest playback effects  leave Lock to Time Signature  on    e For    aural editing    to uncover editing errors  turn Lock to Time  Signature off    e For pickup measures or measures split between lines  turn Lock  to Time Signature off  Playback will ignore current time signa   ture  Make sure rhythm values are consistent in all parts     Hoey                       Pickup Measure  typical     Split    Measure  typical   FIGURE 4   12  Pickup and split measures    NOTE  Lock to Time Signature  on or off  will reflect its actual rep   resentation in MIDI  When an unedited ENF file is saved to  MIDI with Lock to Time Signature unchecked  the resulting  MIDI file may produce measures with various meters  When  checked  all measures will have constant meters        USING SmartScore 67    J    ENF Playback  4 5 2 Tempo    Default tempo for all time signatures is 120 beats per minute  120 bpm   except for music which is either in    cut time    or in 2 4 time  60 beats  per minute      NOTE  To change default tempo in the ENF view  always establish a     base    or default tempo first  This is done by selecting  Tempo under the Edit menu  The metronome tool  in the     Tempo    palette  is used to update default tempo     e Default tempo    To set or to alter default playback tempo in ENF  open Edit  gt  Tempo  and set a new default speed  This can also be done in the Playback  Console        Base rote  eat E    Cancel   FF Metororne  Mak
189. lassical guitar notation 22  Clef 252  clefs  editing 213  transposition 139  unifying 170  Coda 167  collapsed systems 122  Color Mode  overriding automatic color 150  parts and voices 63  149  150  Colors  defining 234  conductor score from parts 39  45   124  contrapuntal voices 3  16       258 USING SmartScore    Controlling System 117  Copy 224   ENF region to clipboard 90  copy and paste 14  Counterpoint 255  courtesy accidentals 136  crescendos and decrescendos   hiding 155   inserting 158   properties 162  Crop 51  cross measure beaming 153  cross staff voicing 152    D  da Capo 168  dal Segno 168  Darkness  scanning 29  35  Delete  quick 14  delete 82  a note from chord 13  80  entire system 134  selected group of objects 133    INDEX    dynamics 137  156  inserting 157  properties 163  164    E  EDIT menu 223  Edit Shapes 87  97  moving fret and chord symbols  102  endings 39  endings  multiple  editing 165  ENF 256  adding or removing parts 147  associate view with image 232  bracketing 103  creating a new page 89  creating from scratch 88  Cut  Copy and Paste 223  editing files 11  editing modes 79  editing scanned files 32  Error Check 83  Graphical Controllers 69    selected ties  amp  articulations 133 joining files 125  when all else fails  Tip  82  230 multiple endings 166  Delete   Delete Any toggle 80  Paging 130    133  dithered images 28  dot  delete 15  Dot of Prolongation 85  253  drag zoom  MIDI 181  drums  automatic drum patterns 108  virtual 111  wor
190. lay does not update ENF notation  Raw MIDI data can only be dis   played as ENF notation when it is reintroduced into a new ENF docu   ment  This is because MIDI data lacks all information about page  layout  stem direction  voices  etc  MIDI data is time based while ENF  notation data is graphical and contains much more visual information  of the music  Changes made in the MIDI environment can be heard  during ENF playback but the ENF graphical representation remains  unchanged  You can modify data in MIDI view  return to ENF view  and still retain changes made in MIDI by using the PLAY button in the  play console  It is always possible to return to ENF display only for  playback by selecting Playback  gt  Refresh MIDI or by using the Spa   cebar to play  The following table attempts to clarify the relationship  between ENF and MIDI views     Table 7  ENF View and MIDI View Relationships                         ENF to MIDI MIDI to ENF ENF View MIDI View  DISPLAY PLAYBACK  MIDI View is ENF View is NOT    ENF  lt  gt  MIDI ENF  gt  MIDI  automatically automatically  Updates  Updates  updated updated Both Ways  One Way   TO UPDATE DISPLAY                    TO UPDATE PLAYBACK  Select MIDI in Select View  gt  Con     Spacebar   Refreshes MIDI   the Navigator or   vert MIDI to ENF    Refresh MIDI    Close MIDI view   View  gt  New Play button   return to ENF   MIDI View Refresh MIDI    push MIDI again                             USING SmartScore 177    ESk    MIDI Editing and Seq
191. lef  use Transpose  by Clef  func   tion  See    Transposition    on page 139 for more details     9 15 1 Part Linking before applying Unify    If your ENF score contains collapsing and expanding systems  it is rec   ommended to perform Part Linking before Unifying  Unifying signa   tures and clefs will maintain part linkages as set in Logical Part  Linking  Refer to    Re link Parts    on page 121 for more details     9 15 2 Unify Key and Time    E Uy bey and Tire       Babe on Hiii Piai ba hangit   amp  Babee on boparcett hall prt       Be indy Cink   amp  Pane enp menirs       Jasdonjamesas of Tet gestern       D Fati Emp Beste  Lot  ca      FIGURE 9   24  Unify Key  Time and Clefs       e Based on Ist system  Parse for changes       USING SmartScore 169    Detailed ENF Editing    All key and time signatures for every part are updated based on signa   tures found in the first system on the first page  Any changes in key or  time signatures are read in and subsequent systems are updated as they  are encountered  Use when systems have a consistent number of parts     e Based on topmost staffline   Default     All key and time signatures for every part are updated based on signa   tures found in the first staffline of each system  Any change of key or  time signatures found in the topmost staffline will update subsequent  stafflines of each system  Use when systems do not have a consistent  number of parts     9 15 3 Unify Clefs  e Parse every measure  Default     Clefs are u
192. n  hit the    A    key  This toggles  between Begin beam  Middle beam and End beam note configurations     9 3 6 Flags and beams  F     The    F    key toggles between flag and beam note attributes of any  clicked note  Flag beam toggle works in both Insert or Change modes     9 3 7 Stem direction  S     The    S    key changes the default note stem direction  In Insert mode   toggling the    S    key reverses the default stem direction of an inserted  note     Default stem direction of an inserted note is determined by its vertical  position on the staff  Stem direction of inserted notes automatically  changes when the cursor crosses the middle line of any staff     To place a note with a stem in the opposite direction of the cursor     e Hit the    S    key before inserting any given note  Or right click   Windows  while inserting  option   click for Mac      TIP  To reverse the stem directions of several notes at one time  press  the    O    key  drag to select a group of notes  Then press the    S     key to reverse the stem direction of all selected notes     To change the stem direction of an existing note     a  Toggle the    C    key to activate the Change mode        USING SmartScore 1 35    Detailed ENF Editing    b  Right click on any given notehead  option   click for Mac   The  stem direction will change     NOTE  In general  Voice  1 should have stems up and Voice  2  should have stems down     To change the stem direction of several notes at once     a  Hit the
193. n Berger   SmartScore was designed and developed by  Christopher Newell and Wladyslaw Homenda   Programming by ICT  S A   Warsaw  Poland     SmartScore is a registered trademark of Musitek Corporation     Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation  Windows is a trademark of  Microsoft Corporation     Apple  Macintosh and OS X ares registered trademarks of Apple Computer  Inc         USING SmartScore    Important Information Regarding  Reproduction of Copyrighted Printed  Music and the    Fair Use    doctrine    Title 17 of the US Code governs the making and reproduction of works  protected by copyright  Under this code  reproduction  distribution and  display of works protected under copyright is illegal if done without the  permission of the copyright owner unless the proposed use falls under  the definition of    Fair Use        If you have reservations that your proposed use of SmartScore may be  in violation of copyright law  consult with your attorney        USING SmartScore    Table of Contents    Chapter 1  Introduction to SmartScore                    1  What SmartScore does                             1  So  what do you want to do                             2  What   s new with Version 3                           3  What Edition does what                         4  Parts and Voices in SmartScore                      5  What to do when this manual does not help                           6  Chapter 2  Installation and Quick Tour                9  Ins
194. n Measure 24 in insert     2 3 4 Playback    Just hit the spacebar to playback this fine little piece by Antonio Soler   SmartScore has scrolling playback  so you will be able to see which  notes are sounding while the file plays  The TIFF window closes during  play    The Spacebar acts as a Playback   Pause toggle control  You can also  control ENF playback with the floating Mini Console  Transport con   trols are colored and there is a handy tempo controller that smoothly  speeds up or slows down playback the further the slider is moved away  from the center  Letting go returns the    spring loaded    slider back to  the center and the default tempo resumes     Mwape t gt        Spring loaded    tempo controller  FIGURE 2   4  Mini Console    We will now process a second sample of music and see how Smart   Score helps you edit parts  assign instrument sounds and isolate a part   Most scores have parts joined together into    systems     Each horizontal  staff of each system represents a    visible    part or active instrument        14 USING SmartScore    Installation and Quick Tour    2 3 5 Editing Gluck    SONG yy a  Push the Recog button in the Navigator  If you have any open  BOOK documents  you will be asked to save them  In the Begin Recog    nition window press Add Files to List  In the Open window   ido a double click GLUCK  TIF inside the SmartScore folder     b  In the Begin Recognition window  click to remove the check  mark next to    Text    checkbox Since ther
195. n the first lyric block below beginning note or rest of the  staffline     6 3 Text and Lyrics  Changing Styles and Entering    6 3 1 Changing styles of Text and Lyrics    Out of recognition  all text fields and lyric blocks are matched to the  closest font type and size available on your computer  You can change  the font type  size and color of text and lyrics  Modifying the style of  any lyric block will change ALL lyric blocks because lyric blocks are  tightly integrated and text fields are not  they   re    dumb            To modify font styles of text fields or lyric blocks     a  Push the    T    button to enter Text mode  The Select tool will    highlight more than one text field and changes will apply to all   Right click  alt   option  click for Mac  to open the Style win   dow       For lyrics  push the    L    button and click on either the associated    note or rest or directly into a lyric field  Right click to open the  Style window  alt   option  click for Mac      The current text style will be highlighted in the Text Style window   Other font styles found in the current document will also be displayed        96    USING SmartScore    Editing Text and Symbols    c  Click on the style you wish to change and then select    Modify    Style        Add Style    and    Delete Style    options are also available       Font  EFE cs          Current style            Tr Webdings          r Effects Sample  I Strikeout  ry AaBbYyZz       ii E v    Soi  l    Westem 7     
196. ncal    FIGURE 9   18  Hairpin Properties       1 62 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing    e Velocity sliders  Start value and Ending value   e Range  10 to 127  Note Velocity     9 12 3 Dynamic Marking Properties      wird          i  Deikina      bi damh biy voce ty all degree rere od bh pr T  es n j hani ee ee      m   tance    FIGURE 9   19  Dynamic Marking Properties    e Volume slider  Resets the volume for the current part   e Range  10 to 127  General Volume     NOTE  To view the selected range of accelerando descelerando  push  the    Hidden Objects    button  Range is shown with dotted  line     9 12 4 Slur  Legato  Properties    Slur Pita per liea    E heim  ae    M irs Bet ndia      F hgh woheraied Ani fegan ii al diun     ee T eee ee    ceai      FIGURE 9   20  Dynamic Marking Properties       e Increase duration of notes associated with the slur   e Percentage   10 to 50   MIDI Note Duration   e None   No increase of note duration       USING SmartScore 163    Detailed ENF Editing    9 12 5 Tempo Marking Properties    lame Aothine   raper lie    Bari bo cet    E hpi the anoa cating in al erga raring a hha ya   Apa hije tiraji ioi i bitik  jiamai eied    CE  e    FIGURE 9   21  Tempo Marking Properties       e Tempo slider  Resets tempo  Beats per Minute    e Range  20 to 400  Beats per Minute      9 12 6 Trill Properties    M  Peon chair  I arais damin  e     T App tha m  rgr in nll bls  T dipi heme petirggy iiia al he flay 7 eT T    Lie  ewer      FIGURE 
197. nd are  separated from each other by dashes  underlines and or periods     NOTE  Lyrics may be found below a system  e g  some choral scores   and a special option should be selected before Recognition   See    Lyrics Under Last Staff of Systems    on page 39     TIP  Nudge notes in Edit Shapes to verify lyric to note associations        94 USING SmartScore    Editing Text and Symbols    To edit existing lyrics     a     g     Push the    L    button in the Text and Controllers toolbar to enter  Lyric mode       Click into a lyric block or on an associated note or rest  Once    highlighted  text within the block can be edited like normal text       Use the left arrow or right arrow buttons on your keyboard to    navigate within a lyric block  Once positioned  type normally   Click and drag on one or more characters within the block to  replace with new characters or to delete one or more characters in  a lyric block  Characters can also be cut  copied or pasted else   where using standard Ctrl      X        C    and    V    keyboard short   cuts  Cmnd      X        C    and    V    for Mac        To edit a lyric block below the current line of lyrics  click into the    topmost line of lyrics and use the down arrow key  Cursor will  enter the next lyric block in line immediately below  Hit Return  to start a new lyric line  and new lyric block  beginning at the  first note of system       Use Backspace key to delete characters within a lyric block     Lyrics can be moved up or
198. nd closes SmartScore Toolbar       USING SmartScore 241    Reference    11 11 4 View  gt  Image Toolbar  Opens and closes Image Editing Toolbar    11 11 5 View  gt  Status Bar    Opens and closes Status Bar at the bottom of main SmartScore Win   dow  Displays current page  cursor position  image size  and zoom per   centage    11 11 6 View  gt  New MIDI View  Opens New MIDI View dialog box  Select type of view   e Overview  Displays all staves as MIDI tracks  e Piano Roll  Displays selected stave as MIDI track  e Event List  Displays MIDI events of selected stave  11 11 7 View  gt  Show Track 0  only in Overview   Displays MIDI channel 0 in MIDI Overview    11 11 8 View  gt  Synchronize    Synchronizes measure sizes in all MIDI views to that of current MIDI  view  Further horizontal resizing synchronized between all MIDI  views     11 11 9 View  gt  New ENF View    Opens the MIDI to ENF window for converting the active MIDI file  into and ENF document     11 12 MIDI OPTIONS Menu  11 12 1 Options  gt  Snap to  Quantization     Quantities selected MIDI    Note On    events to the nearest    tick    speci   fied  Also determines default quantization value for MIDI recording  and for horizontal nudging of selected MIDI events by mouse dragging  or by use of the arrow keys  Quantization values range from 32nd trip   let to whole note        242 USING SmartScore    Reference  11 12 2 Options  gt  Time Format    Select whether start time of note events is displayed with Measure   Be
199. nd solo violin scores are unique in the world of  published music  Usually more than two voicelines are present  each  voiceline represented by notes with opposite stem directions  In classi   cal guitar notation  different voices represent the four plucking fingers  of the right hand and in solo violin music  notes with stems in opposite  directions represent the four strings of the instrument  A closely spaced  cluster of three or four disconnected notes  stems pointing in either  direction with their noteheads slightly offset represents a    chord     Such  interesting formulations pose real challenges to intelligent music scan   ning software       a  Push the Recognition button in the Navigator  In the Begin Rec   ognition window  push Add Files to List and select GUI   TAR TIF from the SmartScore folder and press Open  or double   click the filename   Press Begin Recognition        22 USING SmartScore    Installation and Quick Tour      Push spacebar to Play  Notice as the music plays  notes have    three colors  including green  The green notes represent the third  or tertiary voice  Hit spacebar again to Stop     With the Select Tool     O    key   click on the text    MY    in Mea   sure 5 to highlight  Hit    Delete    to remove it       Open the Playback Console  Ctrl   9   Cmnd   9   Click into    Instrument selection for Track 1   Voice 2  Change Nylon String  Guitar to Tango Accordion  Push the spacebar and listen to how  contrapuntal voices become more distinct
200. newly recorded tracks are lost   For details  see    Updating and refreshing playback and display    on  page 177    11 8 ENF Help Menu    11 8 1 Help  gt  SmartScore Manual  PDF     In CD versions  this selection will open the file  SSManual pdf  This  file is the full Using SmartScore Version 2 0 manual in Adobe Acrobat  format  It can be opened by Adobe Acrobat     In download versions  this selection will attempt to open an Internet  connection and begin downloading of the file  SSManual pdf from the  Musitek website  If the file is moved to the SmartScore directory  the       238 USING SmartScore    Reference    file will open when the Help  gt  SmartScore Manual  PDF  selection is  made again     11 8 2 Help  gt  Online Help    This selection will attempt to launch your Internet browser and connect  to a special interactive help system online at musitek com  The Online  Help system is fully interactive and contains index links  table of con    tents links and text hyperlinks to related subjects     11 8 3 Help  gt  Helper Files    This selection will direct your Internet browser and connect to a special  online directory that contains various help and install files that may be  helpful  For Mac users who downloaded their versions  files include   FreeMIDI   OMS   Acrobat Reader    11 9 MIDI FILE Menu    11 9 1 File  gt  New    Select between a new ENF or a new MIDI  Choosing New ENF will  open the New SmartScore Document window  Select a Template or use  Custom to creat
201. ng Previous System    d  Now  check the Merge checkbox  When the Next System button  is pushed  the two systems will join into a single system  Con   tinue using Next System again until all separated parts are cor   rectly joined  Review Part Name checkboxes for correctness        USING SmartScore 121    Changing Score Structure  8 3 2 Re linking optimized systems    In scores with collapsed or expanded systems  also known as optimized  systems   Re link Parts allows you to reassign parts to stafflines of any  selected system  Within such scores  parts may disappear  become dou   bled or reappear in a later system  By re linking parts of optimized  scores  parts will play back correctly as they disappear and reappear  throughout the score  In addition to proper playback  the MIDI file cre   ated for such files will have tracks and channels properly threaded     To re link parts in a system     a  Position your cursor over a system to be re linked  Hit Ctrl L   Win    Cmnd L  Mac  to open Re link Parts window           p    ee  a    Ta   Sve   p 5     R  E        FIGURE 8   3  Re link Parts window    All parts listed in System Manager   s Super System appear in the main  list of the Re link Parts window  see    System Manager    on page 143  for more information   Checked boxes represent which parts were  assigned to each staff of the active system     b  Check the part names that are actually associated with the active  system  Be sure to remove checks from parts that are not
202. ng note  to Insert a new note along the stem  The new note inherits the  same duration of the original note     Delete a single note from a chord cluster     e Press the    X    key with the Cluster Tool active and click on any  note to remove it from the chord  Delete Any will erase the entire  chord     5 4 General Note Editing    Pp TIP  The    FT    key will reset all windows and palettes to their default       startup    positions  Use when things get messy     5 4 1 Undo    To undo any edit action  hold the Ctrl and    Z    keys down  Cmnd   Z  for Mac   Repeat again to undo a previous action        80    USING SmartScore    Editing Notes and Rests  5 4 2 Tool Palettes  F2 F9 keys     All notation objects used in SmartScore can be selected from one of  D several Tool Palettes            A NOTE  For full description of all SmartScore tool palettes  turn to   Tool Palettes   Section 11 2  on page 211     To quickly select any alternative Tool Palette  right click  Ctrl   click     for Mac  on any open Tool Palette  All possible Tool Palettes become   yi available for selection  Notice that the    active    palette is replaced by  the newly selected palette when Recycle is the palette mode     TIP  Quick Select  Ctrl   Click  is probably the quickest way to   BY select an object to Insert or Change  Hold down the Ctrl button       and click on any object in the active staff line  The cursor will  become that object and also inherit its attributes     Pu TIP  Notes can be s
203. nician     Customer ID  Serial Number           e SmartScore Version Number   found under Help  gt  About SmartScore   e Windows or Macintosh operating system you are running under   e Model of Scanner you are using  e The type of music you are scanning  orchestral  hand written   etc     e Your e mail address        USING SmartScore 7    Installation                              9    Recognition of Scanned Music                         9  System Report                             10  ENF Editing                                11  Playback                           14  Changing Instrument sounds                        17  Working with the System Manager                     18   Changing Parts and MIDI instruments                          19   Manipulating a Multiple voice Score                   20  Extracting Parts and Voices                    21   Editing Lyrics and Text                        21  Editing three or more voices                      22   Open MIDI View                        23  Viewing all open windows using Tile         rata RAE TEE 23       8 USING SmartScore    Chapter 2 Installation and  Quick Tour    2 1 Installation    With the packaged CD  you will be able to install SmartScore an unlim   ited number of times onto your computer  Application files should not  be copied to other computers  SmartScore will operate only when  installed correctly  Both the Internet and CD installers are copy pro   tected as a precaution against software piracy  Internet in
204. no Edition  Not found in MIDI or Guitar Editions     Limited to processing music with no more than 2 staves per system  No  text or lyric recognition or editing  No guitar or chord symbols  No  MIDI recording or editing     e Guitar Edition  Not found in MIDI or Piano Editions     Limited to processing music with no more than 1 staffline per system   No text or lyric recognition or editing  No MIDI recording or editing     e MIDI Edition  Not found in Piano or Guitar Editions     Limited to processing music with no more than 4 staves per system  No  text or lyric recognition or editing  No guitar or chord symbols  Limited  score editing     1 5 What to do when this manual does not help       When you register your copy of SmartScore  you become eligible for  technical support for as long as you own the product  But before you  reach for the phone  try to solve your issues first by referring to this  manual  E mail is the most efficient method of communicating with  Musitek Technical Support We recommend attaching any scanned       6 USING SmartScore    Introduction to SmartScore    images you are having trouble with along with a brief description of the  problems you are facing  Technical Support E mail address is   tech  musitek com    If you must phone in for help  we ask that you have a few things ready  before calling Technical Support     e Please have your computer on with SmartScore up and running  e Please have the following information ready to give the support  tech
205. note     To delete all articulation marks and slurs in a selected area     a  Use the Select tool     O    key  to drag a box around the area from  which you wish to remove articulations        USING SmartScore 161    Detailed ENF Editing    b  Once the area is selected  hit the    G    key to delete all articula   tions in the selected region     9 12 Properties Tool    The    Properties    tool displays and alters playback values of dynamic  and articulation markings  Changes can be applied to the marking itself  or globally to all similar markings and applied as new defaults     To activate the Properties window of an object   a  Hit the    Esc    key or select the Properties icon from the Smart   Score toolbar   b  Click on a listed marking below to open its properties     9 12 1 Property Options  All Properties windows     e Apply  changed property  to All   Selecting this option will update playback properties of the same  mark throughout the score    e Apply Setting s  to All Future Files   Selecting this option will permanently reset the default value for  the selected property to its new values for all future ENF files    e Back to Default   This will reset values to application launch defaults    e Reset Defaults   This will return values to new installation defaults     9 12 2 Hairpin  Cresc  and Decresc  Properties    Hairpin Properties EJ    iiai   a  Erecting   bal ine  Tant ia iisi    dpi bhe makiy i ga ba l He  hysh bhae mwingi niio al iue Red Dea    l oH   La
206. nstruments and parts   For the purposes of this manual  we use the adjective    contrapuntal     rather than    polyphonic     Contrapuntal voices are fundamental to  SmartScore   s design  Refer to    Working with Voices    on page 62 for  more details        254 USING SmartScore    Glossary    Counterpoint   Similar to polyphony but more formalized by the theo   retical  rule based conventions of music composition  Counterpoint  usually refers to the melodic and rhythmic relationship between parts  or voices     12 4 MIDI Terms    MIDI  Musical Instrument Digital Interface  Originally a hardware  device that allowed a computer and a synthesizer to communicate  now  a generally accepted term for hardware or software that operate accord   ing to General MIDI standards     Standard MIDI File  SMF    The file protocol or format for music  files saved as MIDI   MID extension   Includes Type 1  multiple track    multiple channel  and Type 0  single track   multiple channel  formats     Device  A MIDI driven tone generator  Sound cards  synthesizers  and  MIDI modules all fall under this category     MIDI Event   Each piece of information contained within a MIDI file  is an event  This includes Notes  attack and release   Control Changes   System Exclusive  Meta Events  Program Changes  etc     Velocity   The speed at which the note was struck  measured with a  number from 0 127     Channel  A MIDI device sends and receives MIDI information along  separate and distinct Channels  E
207. nt  staff and sys   tem spacing as well as instrument assignments at the voice level within  a part  Here  we will isolate the solo part and copy it to a new docu   ment     PIANO  GUITAR    2 4 1 Extracting a part in System Manager    NOTE  Normally all parts  represented by staff lines  play simulta   neously  SmartScore considers each staff of a system as a     Part    and also as a MIDI track  A given part may or may not  be visible in every system  These irregular or expanding  amp   collapsing systems are sometimes referred to as    optimized     systems  See    Part visibility    on page 145 and    Re link  Parts    on page 121 for more details on controlling visibility  and linking of parts     a  Hit  Ctrl   M   Cmnd   M  or select System Manager from  Edit menu     Phire    iai Vami 5 ski       Pal Caen Piar Derd Pian  Fa Gaued Pla    T Gpo Aabe ta  el      He aor w                     f jedet fe ee  Flute part A rai B E          extracted   from the   r   E EE A ee go  original    SEE  ENF i   document    p   s pi       Sere       FIGURE 2   7  Extracting a part in System Manager       18 USING SmartScore    C     Installation and Quick Tour      Remove    Visibility checkmarks    for PianoR and PianoL parts    in the far left column  Check    Visibility    in the Apply region   Push Apply to New to create a new document which will include  only the part s  selected by visibility checkmarks     Play the flute part  then close this newly created document     2 4 2 C
208. nt in the pull down menu     NOTE  In Playback Console  select a channel  voice color and num   ber  and choose a new MIDI instrument from pull down  menu     9 6 3 Part visibility    Checkmarks along the far left column identify which parts SmartScore  thinks are visible in the active system  they can be turned on or off   Individual parts and or voices can be isolated or they can be    removed     from a score by selective use of Visibility  Selected parts or removed   un selected  parts can be extracted to new files without altering the  original document     To change Part Visibility     a  Check or uncheck the Visibility box next to a Part Name to  restore or remove visibility of that Part     b  Select Visibility in the Apply field and choose a scope from the     Apply To    pull down menu  See    Applying changes to the  score    on page 146 for details on    Apply To    options     c  Push Apply to apply to the current document or Apply to New to  extract part s  to or remove part s  from a new ENF document   9 6 4     Voice visibility  To change Voice Visibility   a  Highlight a visible part by clicking on the dot next to Part Name   b  Check or uncheck the Visibility box below the desired voice     c  Select    Visibility    in the Apply field and choose a scope from the     Apply To    pull down menu     d  Apply changes the open file  Apply to New creates a new ENF  file        USING SmartScore 145    Detailed ENF Editing    TIP  Part and voice extraction removal 
209. nterface is selected  under Input in the MIDI Devices window  See    MIDI Devices     on page 183 for more      b  From the Realtime menu  select Step Time Record     c  Select a track  The default is set to    New Track     If you wish to  record onto an existing MIDI track  select that track in the New  View window     d  Press OK        206 USING SmartScore    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    e  A floating window representing the computer keyboard number  pad and associated note durations appears  Record is now staged     TRIPLETS    Prev   Beat    Next  Measure       KS  Next  Beat    With Cntl    mayest    Prev  Next  Measure Measure          FIGURE 10   27  Step Time recording  Number Keypad     f  Click on a note value or control button in the floating key pad  window  Or  you may select the corresponding value   control  function using the numerical keypad on your computer keyboard     g  Press the Play button of the Mini Console  Recording will begin  at Measure 1     h  Press a note or chord on your MIDI instrument  Notes of the  selected value will insert  The next note you enter will begin at  the same point the last note ended  e g  In 4 4 time with quarter  note selected  hitting a note four times will fill up one measure     i  To insert a rest  choose a note value and hit Enter or right arrow     10 11 Virtual Drum Kit    In any MIDI view  you can record your own drum tracks onto existing  tracks using nothing more than your computer keyboard  To activate  Virtu
210. nu and choose Black or White   e Line Draw    Some printed scores have weak or missing stafflines and or brackets  that can create problems during recognition and may result in missing  or incorrectly bracketed systems  Sometimes  by accident  brackets  and or barlines are cut off during scanning  If this is the case  you can  manually draw in staffline and brackets or enhance their thicknesses     To draw in missing stafflines and brackets     a  Select Edit  gt  Line or choose Line Draw in the Image Toolbar     b  Push the Pen Color push button in the Image Toolbar  if neces   sary  to choose Black Color     c  In the Width pull down selector  choose a fairly wide thickness   10 20 pixels      d  Click and drag the mouse to draw a line along the missing or bro   ken bracket along the left margin of the music     ED si mms          DP riha iiem    parisi  TIF    FIGURE 3   19  Using Line Draw tool to recreate missing bracket    e  When finished modifying the image  Select File  gt  Save As and  give it a name  You may then Recognize the file with correc   tions     e Paint Brush    To draw free hand lines in your image file  select Brush from the Edit  menu OR press the Brush button in the Image Toolbar  Choose a line  width then click and drag to paint        5 4 USING SmartScore    Scanning and Recognition  3 10 3 Cut   Copy and Paste  e Cut    To Cut an area from the scanned image  use the Select tool and drag a  box with the mouse  Select Edit  gt  Cut  Ctrl   X  Win    
211. o the Super System  Since the active and the Super  System may have completely different values  changes you make to the  score are controlled by which you controlling system you select     e Controlling System   Active is used for most local and global  edits     e Controlling System   Super is used to add or remove parts from  the score  See    Active System vs  Super System    on page 117     9 6 6 Controlling Part Visibility and Part Linking  To make added parts visible in one or more systems     a  See    Super System    on page 118 for adding parts to score     b  To make added part visible  change Controlling System to  Active  Insert Visibility check mark next to Part Name and in the  Apply region below the parts matrix    c  When the Apply To option   Score  the part will be visible in all  systems  When System is selected  part is visible only in active  system  Visibility in subsequent systems   System     Push OK     To re link optimized parts for proper playback   a  Inserting or removing parts may affect continuity of instrument  playback  See    Re link Parts    on page 121 for more information   To remove any part from a score  System Manager  gt  Super System    a  Click the dot corresponding to the part you wish to remove   b  Make sure Apply to  All is selected  Push Remove    9 7 Instrument Templates    Basic characteristics of all parts  ENF staves  are inherited from Instru   ment Templates  These include name  abbreviation  MIDI instrument   playback tr
212. of the Play Range   c  Mark Play All to play the entire score   d  Check Loop to continually repeat the assigned playback range     10 5 Piano Roll  To select and display a track in Piano Roll view     a  Select the MIDI button in the Navigator  In the New MIDI View  window  select a track or Part Name  Pushing OK will open the  selected track in piano roll format        FIGURE 10   9  Overview   Selecting a track    b  Select the MIDI track you wish to display and press OK        1 84 USING SmartScore    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    Q  c  Use the magnifying glass in the Main Toolbar to zoom in or out  of the Piano Roll view  Click to zoom in  Right click  option    click for Mac  to zoom out     d  Another zoom method is to drag measure dividers horizontally  and piano key dividers vertically  See Figure 6 on page 181 for  more details on zooming           Pe SS ae ae SS ele ee   ee       aa a Tress r ma z pem Tr  i re  FIGURE 10   10  MIDI Piano Roll View  DP TIP  It is often helpful to have several tracks visible at once  Use the    an Tile button to neatly display several open Piano Roll views     10 5 1 Velocity and Tempo Graphical Controllers    In Piano Roll view  the bottom pane of the window displays a graphi   cal  continuous change MIDI controller  Click into controller Selector  pulldown menu to select the MIDI controller you wish to effect a  change to           FIGURE 10   11  Velocity and Tempo controllers in Piano Roll view    With the pencil mouse pointer  
213. olbar alternate as  well     e Insert mode allows you to insert objects when clicking any   where in the active staffline    e Change mode allows you to change existing objects to the  selected notation object        You can select any editing mode from the SmartScore Toolbar     RPP re RW Mou E ae      FIGURE 5   2  SmartScore Toolbar with Insert mode selected    TIP  In areas that are particularly crowded with objects  nudge notes    horizontally in Edit Shapes to make room  See 5 5 on page 87        USING SmartScore 79    Editing Notes and Rests    5 3 2 Delete by Group   Delete Any    Press the    X    key of your computer keyboard to toggle between the  Delete by Group and Delete Any modes     In the Delete by Group mode  the cursor becomes an arrow with the  selected object type in grey  In the Delete Any mode the cursor  becomes an arrow with an    X    next to it     x  Del    To    To    Ww    Mlle       e Delete by Group mode deletes any object that is listed in the  active Tool Palette group  Objects from other groups will not be  deleted    e Delete Any mode removes any notation object that is clicked  with the mouse  NOTE  This action will remove an entire chord   To remove a single note from a chord  hit the    X    then    Z    key     5 3 3 Chords  Cluster Tool   attach note to existing note stem  Chord building  Tool     a  Press the Cluster Tool button        Z    key  in the    Notes    palette     b  While in the Insert mode  click above or below an existi
214. ons  Turn to    Recognition Sequence  Win   Mac     on page 37  to continue     If your scanner does not respond properly  choose File  gt  Scan Music  gt   Choose Interface  gt  Your Scanner   s  gt  Automatic     3 4 4 Choosing Your Scanner   s Interface  Automatic    Try this selection first if your scanner does not respond to SmartScore   s  scanning interface  Both this option and the alternative  Manual   option use your scanner   s interface to acquire multiple pages of music   Each scanned page is analyzed for optimum resolution  If the resolution  is out of range  you will be prompted with a recommended resolution   You can choose to retry scanning again or to ignore and continue  Both  options will save multiple scanned pages in a single  highly compressed  image file format  TIFF CCITT Group IV      NOTE  Once you make a successful scan  it will not be necessary to  reselect either your scanner or interface  They are stored     a  Place the first page of your score face down into your scanner     b  If your scanning software has a Preview button  push it     Notice the scanning region defined in your scanner   s preview window   The scan region is bounded by flashing dots  marching ants or by some  other obvious delineator and can be resized  This bounding box identi   fies the boundaries of the area to be scanned        34 USING SmartScore    Scanning and Recognition    c  With your mouse  click and drag the edges of the bounding box  so the entire area of the mus
215. oom Window        a  Go to View menu  select    Zoom Window    and    TIFF    view            Eii Far hai    a  s    FIGURE 9   2  View  gt  Zoom Window    b  To increase or decrease zoom view of the window  choose a  zoom magnification from View  gt  Zoom Window selection   Available zoom levels are Normal  1x   2x and 3x magnification        USING SmartScore 129    Detailed ENF Editing  9 1 2 Scrolling    Use the scroll bar and up down arrows to the right of the ENF window   You may also use the arrow keys located on your computer keyboard to  scroll up  down  left  and right in an ENF document     9 1 3 Paging  To page forward or backward in an ENF document     til G  e Use the    Next page         Previous page    buttons located in the    Main Toolbar or push the double paging arrows at the lower  5 right hand corner of the SmartScore window     9 1 4 Go To    Ctrl  G or Cmnd G for Mac     While editing  you can quickly jump to any page or measure in ENF  file     To open the GoTo    window    a  Choose the View menu and select Go To     Ctrl G or Cmnd G  for Mac    O  L  n     owe Pai 1 H  r Eme   mnia fi    P Doce paged trees acon Li    a     FIGURE 9   3  Go To window       b  Select whether it is a Part  Page or Measure you wish to jump to    c  Enter the Part  Page or Measure number    d  Checking the Open Target in New View box will open a new  ENF at the targeted Part  Page or Measure  Push OK to jump    9 1 5 Tool Palettes  F1 F9 keys     All notation objects use
216. or Future        9 7 1 Transposed Instruments    Because ensemble instruments have such wide pitch ranges  it is neces   sary for transcribers to notate certain instruments in key signatures that  are remote from others in the ensemble  Players of transposed instru   ments    read    and    transpose    naturally without worrying that the part  they are reading is actually out of tune  In order for an ENF score with  transposed instruments to play back correctly  transposition of playback       148 USING SmartScore    df    Detailed ENF Editing    by specified amounts must be set  This is accomplished for preset    instruments in the Instrument Templates but it is also possible to  compensate for transposed instruments in the Playback Console     9 8 Working with Voices and Colors    SmartScore uses 2 main color modes for viewing your music as well as  for controlling how MIDI data is handled  Color by Part or Color by  Voice  Each mode will change certain characteristics of how the nota   tion is displayed and how parts and voices are assigned to MIDI chan   nels  Changing the color mode of an open ENF document can be done  at any time  Nothing is lost by switching back and forth between color  modes     To select or change the color mode for an open ENF score   a  Choose Options  gt  Color Mode  gt  Voice to color by voicelines   b  Choose Options  gt  Color Mode  gt  Part  gt  Color to color by part     c  Choose Options  gt  Color Mode  gt  Part  gt  Black to color all pa
217. or or choose Open  Ctrl    O   Cmnd   O  Mac   from the File menu     b  Change Files of Type pull down menu to Image Files   c  Browse and highlight an image file from the listed saved files   Press Open   e Image Information  Select View  gt  Image Information to display characteristics about the  current scanned image including resolution  file type and page size   e Zoom    To Zoom in and out click the Zoom Tool in the Main toolbar  Ctrl   Q    Cmnd   Q for Mac   Click inside the image will increase the scale of  your view  Zoom In   while right click  Option   click for Mac  will  decrease the scale of your view  Zoom Out      e Page    To view pages of an image file  use the paging buttons in the Main  Toolbar or select Next Page  Previous Page from the View menu        5 0 USING SmartScore       Scanning and Recognition  e Image Toolbar    Crop RotateL Brush Select Color  Reverse RotateR Line Deskew Thickness  FIGURE 3   15  Image Toolbar    3 10 1 Page Tools          e Crop    To crop an image file  trimming unwanted portions of your image from  outside a marked frame         a  Go to the Edit menu and choose the Selection option OR press  the Select tool button in the Image Toolbar   BADO 4 Neo A   a       FIGURE 3   16  Selecting Region for Cropping    b  With your mouse  drag a box around the area you wish to keep  If  you want to extend the cropping region outside of the display   keep dragging  the page will scroll as you drag up or down    c  To adjust the marke
218. ore    To activate built in soft synthesizer  Macintosh QuickTime Musical  Instruments   choose QT Internal Playback     4 1 6 OMS Setup  Mac Classic Only     NOTE  To work properly  OMS requires AppleTalk to be turned  OFF     If you intend to record MIDI to your Mac or if you use an external  MIDI device interface  make sure you have installed OMS from the  SmartScore installer  Choose OMS  gt  OMS Setup to run the setup rou   tine  Choose Easy OMS Setup to begin  Leave    Run MIDI in Back   ground    unchecked  If you have an external MIDI device attached to  either your printer or modem parallel port  select the right port in the  first window  Following MIDI Setup  you should see all available  MIDI devices in the display screen  These same devices will appear in  the MIDI Device window in SmartScore and in OMS Studio Setup  when selected     NOTE  For USB connections  select both Printer and Modem  options     Select Playback  gt  QT Internal Playback if you want to play back  through QuickTime Musical Instruments  QuickTime 3 0 or better  only         60 USING SmartScore    ENF Playback    NOTE  If no sound is heard after pressing the space bar  select     Refresh MIDI    from the Playback menu then reselect QT  Internal Playback from the Playback menu  Check speaker  volume     4 2 Error Check    It   s a good idea to select Edit  gt  Error Check  Ctrl   E for Win    Cmnd   E for Mac  to quickly identify problem measures before mov   ing on to more editing activities 
219. ore 89    coc  om  D   sear    X    l        D   poe     X    MIDI    Editing Notes and Rests  5 7 3  Real Time Recording    An alternative to entering notes in by hand is to record MIDI based  performances using a MIDI keyboard or some other MIDI instrument   For more about this  see  MIDI Recording   Section 10 9  on page 202     5 7 4 Step Time Recording    An alternative to Real Time Recording is Step Time Recording  Step  Time Recording is done in MIDI and can be a very fast method of  entering in notes  when you can   t scan it in of course    For more  turn  to  Step Time Recording   Section 10 10  on page 206     5 7 5 Select Area  create bitmap for pasting     To Copy an area of an ENF file for pasting into another application   e g Microsoft    Worde  Adobe    Photoshop    etc       a  Press the    O    key to activate the Select tool     b  Right click  option   click for Mac  and drag to select desired  region in the ENF pane     c  Hit  Ctrl  C  Cmnd C  or Edit  gt  Copy to copy selected region  to the clipboard as a bitmap image     NOTE  Before copying to clipboard  uncheck View  gt  Show Active  Staff  otherwise  you may not capture the entire view     TIP  Use this feature to take    snapshots    of musical snippets and  Paste into word processors or other non music programs     5 8 Saving and Exporting an ENF File    You can save the current ENF file at any time by hitting the Save but   ton in the Main toolbar  by hitting Ctrl   S  Cmnd   S for Mac  or by  
220. ore for visual  editing clues after transposing     To Transpose your entire ENF document to a new key     Pal a  Position your cursor inside the first staffline of the score  Press  Ctrl   T   Cmnd   T for Mac or select the Transpose button in  the SmartScore Toolbar or select Transpose from the Edit menu   The window in Transposition always displays the key signature  or clef sign of the active staff  This is your source key     irk    l  im      Charge O pay a a    ia Fi bima bike aa    A eee               M iiri Sere  be bereri    ia i  n pamint ol ET      Ho  ani a  fon Le     Gireg Hri  Ac rier aie e Fay       oF   Cowl      FIGURE 9   6  Transposition window       b  Select a new target key or target clef for the score by selecting  either the Key or Clef tab  Scroll up or down to select a target key  signature or target clef     c  Closest allows SmartScore to automatically choose up or down  based on the least number of intervals  To choose the direction  manually  select either Up or Down        1 40 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing  9 5 1 Transposition Strategy    You can choose two    strategies    for transposing your scores  Link  Accidentals to Key and Keep Line space     e Link Accidentals to Key    This choice will consider the target key signature during transposition   If the target key belongs to the opposite class than that of the source  key  e g  transposing from a key with sharps to a target key with flats    then accidentals may be swapped to 
221. ors in an ENF file  push the Voice  Visibility button in the SmartScore toolbar or go to the Options menu  and select Color Mode  gt  Voice  The initial default is Options  gt  Color  Mode  gt  Part  gt  Black  Voice color can be turned off or on anytime by  clicking the Voice Visibility button     Voice color is automatically determined based on several factors  num   ber of voices  stem direction  vertical alignment  etc   You can override  voice colors manually  Changing voice color also changes its voice  assignment and  possibly  changes voice assignments of other notes in a  given measure     NOTE  DO NOT override voice colors until a measure is entirely  edited  Unusual color combinations usually correct theme   selves     To override automatic voice color assignment  and change voice num   ber      a  Select desired voice number  and color  from Voice Color  combo button in the SmartScore Toolbar     b  Locate the note or rest in a voice you wish to change and click on  it     c  Color and voice assignment will update as will any other voices  within the same measure  e g  other notes in the same vertical  event     For more about part and voice colors  see    Working with Voices and  Colors    on page 149  See also    Vertical Alignment and offset voices     on page 64        82 USING SmartScore    Editing Notes and Rests  5 4 6 Error Check    Error Check will search each measure looking for voicelines that are  either incomplete or have total durations in excess of 
222. ort pull down menus to select new MIDI output device    e Adjust tempo with the Tempo slider    e Change MIDI Instrument or Channel  Chan  of any voice    part       Transpose the file globally or by individual voices   parts     NOTE  Transposition in the Playback Console is for playback only   To transpose notation  see    Transposition    on page 139     e Mute a voice while all others continue to play or Solo a single  voice   e Use Pan to create a stereo image     4 4 Working with Voices    SmartScore treats contrapuntal voices  multiple voicelines in a single  staff  as a fundamental musical component  In a score   s hierarchy   voices are treated as the    primary building block     You can visualize  your music   s hierarchy by going to Score Structure in the Edit menu    See    Score Structure    on page 124 for more details      All scores contain one or more voices in any given measure  occasion   ally three or four  The ENF editor provides extremely useful voice   based functions including the ability to extract voices to new docu   ments  to split two note chords into separate voices and to control indi   vidual voice playback such as assigning unique MIDI instruments   muting and soloing each voiceline        62 USING SmartScore    ENF Playback  4 4 1 Color Mode  gt  Voice    To view contrapuntal voices as separate colors in an ENF file  push the  Voice Color button in the SmartScore toolbar or go to the Options  menu and select Color Mode  gt  Voice  Each ENF P
223. ou push the Scan button  you will  then be handed off to your scanner   s interface     If you are using your scanner   s interface  follow the following guides     e Place music in the scanner as squarely as possible     e Scan in Black  amp  White  Line Art  1 bit or OCR   Do not scan in  color or in greyscale     Black  amp  White Document    may be grey     e Crop in the music to be scanned by dragging mouse in preview   e Scan between 300 400 dpi  average printed music         30 USING SmartScore    Scanning and Recognition  3 3 Working with HP   scanners in Windows  3 3 1 Choose Interface  gt  SmartScore   s  with HP scanners        For Win XP and Win NT    Go to File  gt  Scan Music  gt  Select Scanner  choose    WIA xxxx xxxx         Do not select    PrecisionScan        Push Scan button or File  gt  Scan Music   gt  Acquire  If problems occur using SmartScore scanning interface  see  Section    below   e For Win 98  Win 2000  a  Push Scan button or File  gt  Scan Music  gt  Acquire   b  Check the Override Grey button in the SmartScore interface   NOTE  Adjust the midpoint where light grey pixels go to white and  dark grey pixels go to black by using the Threshold slider   3 3 2 Choose Interface  gt  Your Scanner   s  with HP scanners     e Working with HP PrecisionScan      a  Go to File  gt  Scan Music  gt  Choose Interface and select  Your Scanner   s  Push the Scan button in the Navigator bar     b  Select    Black and White Document or Text    in PrecisionScan   
224. ove a text field vertically     a  Hold the Shift button down while clicking and dragging a text  field up or down     To move a text field in any direction   a  Push the Edit Shapes button in the Text and Controllers toolbar   b  Position your mouse in the staff associated with the text field     NOTE  You may want View  gt  Show Active Staff checked to verify   Remember to hold the Ctrl button down to keep a particular  staff line active while moving you cursor around the page     c  Click and drag any text field to move  Use the Select tool to  select and move multiple text fields around while in Edit Shapes     To create a new text field     a  Push the    T    button and toggle    C    to enter Insert mode  white  arrow   Click anywhere in an ENF page outside a staff and begin  typing    To delete text fields     a  To delete one or more text fields use the Select tool     O    key  to  highlight fields by clicking or dragging  Hit the Delete  Del  key     NOTE  Click outside any text field to reset cursor  Insert   Change      6 2 Lyrics    Lyrics hold special meaning in SmartScore  A lyric    block    is a string  of characters equivalent to a spoken syllable  Out of recognition  a lyric  block becomes associated with a single note or rest in the staffline  immediately above it  Locating the note or rest associated with a lyric  block is as simple as searching directly above the center justified lyric  block  All lyric blocks within stafflines are horizontally linked a
225. ows  you to select any available SmartScore tool palette    Choose the    Dynamics    Palette  F8         12 USING SmartScore    Installation and Quick Tour  b  Select Mezzo forte  mf  in the    Dynamics    palette  Click in Mea   sure 15 to insert the new dynamic marking     c  Select Piano  f  to activate Piano mark  Insert mark in Measure  14    d  Hit the    X    key and click on the false    P    in Measure 17 to delete  it  Toggle the    C    key to return to Insert mode    e  Select Piano  p  in the    Dynamics    palette to activate Piano  mark  Click to insert the mark in Measure 17            NOTE  To Undo any editing action  select the Undo button in the  e toolbar  Ctrl   Z  Win    Cmnd   Z  Mac       To insert missing barlines     a  Hit the    I    key  The cursor will become a barline     b  Click to insert barlines in the correct spots of Measures 10  amp  17   Using the Quick select tool to change note values     a  In Measure 3  the beamed triplet was recognized with 16th notes   Hold down the Control button of your keyboard and click the  first 16th note of the eighth note triplet in Measure 2  Notice how  the cursor changes to an    eighth note start beam     This action is  what we call Quick Select  Ctrl   Click   Hit the    C    key to tog   gle to the Change mode  with white arrow  and click on the first  note in Measure 3 to correct     b  Ctrl   Click again on the middle note of the triplet in Measure 2   hit the    C    key and click the middle note
226. pdated on a line by line basis  Any change of clef encoun   tered in a given staff updates that staffline until another change of clef  is encountered  Use when many change of clefs are written into the  original score     e Based on Ist Measure of Ist System    All clef signs are updated based on clefs found in the first measure of  the first system  Overwrites any change of clef found  Use if many false  change of clefs were recognized or if very few change of clef signs are  found in the original     9 16 MIDI to ENF    SmartScore accepts any Standard MIDI file and converts it to an ENF  file     To create an ENF document from a MIDI file     a  Select File  gt  Open and change the filetype pull down menu from  SmartScore Files to MIDI Files  All MIDI files in the given  directory will appear in the selection window  Double click on a  selected MIDI file to open     b  The Playback Console window will appear with a MIDI Over   view representation in the background  To hear the file playback   push the Play button in the console        170 USING SmartScore    Detailed ENF Editing    c  To convert the MIDI file into SmartScore notation  push the  Close button in the Playback Console  Closing the console will  begin the conversion process    AAN Te ENF  Deis  l Hea  z Weal  Hoe  re    Cereals       demure  oe Sie    pe   k T resha    Lpiam p  Paga  ore Ez      cms   R    FIGURE 9   25  MIDI to ENF window       Staff Voicing    Choose the number of contrapuntal voices you wish
227. r editing  The    Barlines  and Repeats    palette will open as the secondary palette     9 3 11 Dynamics  P   lt  and  gt     e Press the    P    key to select p  piano  dynamic marking    e Hold down    Shift              to select the crescendo hairpin    e Hold down    Shift              to select the decrescendo hairpin     The    Dynamics    palette will open as the secondary palette     9 3 12 Tuplets  T     The    T    key opens the tuplet  Rhythmic Groups  Palette  Triplet is  selected as the default  Drag the mouse to box in the notes rests to  become the selected tuplet  Drag downwards to insert the tuplet above  the selected notes rests  Drag upwards to insert the tuplet below  selected notes rests     9 3 13 Unify Signatures Clefs  U     Press the    U    key to automatically open the Unify Score window   Unify the clefs  key and time signatures throughout the entire score   Refer to    Unify Key  Time and Clefs  U     on page 169 for details on  using this tool     9 3 14 Note values  Number Pad   To quickly select note duration values     e Use the keyboard Quick Keys number  1   whole note  2   half  note  3   quarter note  etc     Pp TIP  See Quick Keys map on page 174 for a graphic of shortcut  d keys        USING SmartScore 1 37    Detailed ENF Editing  9 4 Navigator  9 4 1 Open  Ctrl O    Cmnd M Mac         E   Ope       Push to open any SmartScore compatible file  Select SmartScore   ENF   Image  TIFF  BMP  PCX   or MIDI file from    Files of Type     pul
228. r part of a score can be accomplished in one of several  ways  The most common is    transpose globally by key     e g  change an  entire song from the key of E Flat to the key of C     Other transposition methods such as transpose by clef  transpose  within a selected range and transpose notes only  either harmonically  or enharmonic ally  are all possible  For information on these addi   tional transposition methods turn to  Transposition   Section 9 5  on  page 139     To transpose the key of an entire score     a  Choose Transpose from the Edit menu  Ctrl  T Win   Cmnd T  Mac         USING SmartScore 87    Editing Notes and Rests    b  The    source    key signature will appear in the main window along  with its signature name listed in both major and relative minor  keys        FIGURE 5   5  Key Transposition  c  Choose to transpose either by Key or by Clef or by Pitch     d  Use the scroller to select a new key signature if by Key or a new  clef sign if by Clef     e  With Closest selected  SmartScore will transpose to the target  key  up or down  with the least number of intervals  Choose Up  or Down if you wish to make your own choice  Push OK     5 7 Creating a New ENF Score from Scratch    5 7 1 New score  To create an empty ENF score using one of several basic templates     a  Push the Score button on the Navigator or select New  gt  New  ENF under the File menu  Ctrl   N  Win    Cmnd   N  Mac       b  Type in a Title for the new score   c  Add the Composer   s nam
229. rd  Record to New Track and Virtual Drum Kit are    also visible   ji stl     e         FIGURE 10   3  MIDI Toolbar          You can also change to a new MIDI view by pressing MIDI in the Nav   igator  Views do not replaced  Each new view overlays all open views     MIDI       10 2 3 Closing MIDI Views    Each MIDI view  Overview  Piano Roll and Event List  has its own      close    icon in the upper left hand corner of the window  Click to close     an active MIDI view window  Or select File  gt  Close  Closing the last  L MIDI view will return display to its associated ENF view        10 3 Track Overview    Overview provides a    bird   s eye view    of all existing MIDI tracks   Some editing functions are limited       FIGURE 10   4  Track Overview window       180 USING SmartScore    Q     MIDI Editing and Sequencing  10 3 1 Selecting tracks and MIDI events    Clicking into a track   s Name field in Overview will highlight the entire  track for cutting pasting shifting  Double clicking into a track   s Name  field will open its Piano Roll view  Right click  option   click Mac  in  the Name field will open the Track Properties window        Name      j   PianoR Cancel    Transpose     fo 7 New Track    Piano Roll   Duplicate Track   Event List   Delete Track         FIGURE 10   5  Track Properties    The Track Properties window allows for editing of the Track Name and  its Transposition  It is also used to create new MIDI tracks  Push Piano  Roll or Event List buttons to v
230. rd Korocke Tile CO Mviter    FIGURE 3   12  Recognition Button          USING SmartScore 43    Scanning and Recognition    A file selection window Begin Recognition will open  Here you will  list your prescanned files for recognition by selecting them  rearranging  them  removing or adding them     Benin Becognilinn    Freese  pare      fi  Tat  Ere language    F Lyer   reme Lari Sla al Spaa  F Tipsi  M ipie    Enia  F Pabi  R bmg  Air DPen ina  fet ol arad     Pai Linking  Edd ram paia kc bp     Fanboaed Gorge  m             FIGURE 3   13  Recognition   Selected Files   Options   Preview    b  In the Begin Recognition window  push Add Files to List     c  Browse to where you stored your scans  Click on an image file to  select  If more than one page was scanned in the SmartScore  scanning interface  the file will appear as a multi page list     NOTE  You may click on and drag image icon s  to the selected files  list of the Begin Recognition window  Some older Windows  operating systems may not support drag and drop     d  You might want to preview pages prior to recognition to check  that pages were scanned completely  that black areas do not  obscure part of the music and that no page is severely skewed   Any of these issues will affect recognition results  Select the Pre   view tab and click on each page to view your pre scanned pages    e  Click on the Options tab to return to the File Selection and  Options window  Options assists the recognizer to    hone in    on  spe
231. reated        Systems detached    Staves broken into sepa   rate systems without  adjoining system  bracket      System bracket cut off  during scanning leaving  disconnected staves     floating        Merge systems  See     Merging Systems    on  page 121        Staffline missing from  system    Staffline cut off during  scanning     Restore missing staff  See     Adding a staff when  missed by recognition             on page 119  Wrong part suddenly Expanding   collapsing Reassign parts in system   plays  score  Part   instrument See    Re link Parts    on  linking lost  page 121  ENF display is brown  ENF mode is in Edit Exit mode     orange or green lines  appear     Shapes  Tempo or Veloc   ity controller mode           Can   t edit a cross staff  note appearing in another  staff or system        Active staff line switches  when cursor is moved to  an adjacent staff line      Visiting    notes can only  be edited when source  staff is highlighted         Select View  gt  Show  Active Staff  Position  cursor over source staff   Note s  in target staff    system will highlight   Press Caps Lock to     freeze    active staff line  and allow editing of notes     visiting    in an adjacent  staff line  Press Caps  Lock again to release     frozen    staff           USING SmartScore    173       Detailed ENF Editing  QuicK Keys Map  Windows     3 830  we  g   Sel    pjq  p  sul    L   s  l  IPA 9  UOIBay PAPS  s  JoN WEA 0  UOIBay PAS  S2104 H  S   S3210 4 PAPS uIof   PD wi   
232. refer to    Creating a Conductor   s  Score from Part Scores    on page 124     3 9 Recognition Accuracy    If recognition accuracy is not as good as what you expected  examine  the image up close by zooming into the image pane of your ENF view   You may also open file in the Image Editor  FIle  gt  Open  gt  Files of  Type   Image      Determine the following by zooming close up     e If close up examination reveals the image to be speckled  salt   and pepper   your scanner may have created a dithered image        46 USING SmartScore    Scanning and Recognition     See page 28   To override automatic dithering  check the    Over   ride Grey    box in the SmartScore interface  Normal thresholding  level is  38  Decreasing will darken the image    e If objects lack detail  rescan with Auto Resolution   On or  increase scanning resolution manually  Optimum distance  between horizontal stafflines is 20 pixels  Use your mouse  pointer and pixel coordinate readout in the Status Bar to measure    e If objects such as note stems and staff lines are broken or lack  thickness  rescan with increased darkness to fill in gaps    e Ifthe source document is poorly printed or is faded and weak  try  locating a better print copy of the music     NOTE  Recognition accuracy is directly related to the quality of the  source document as well as the quality of the scanned image   Cheaper scanners  including Fax Scan Copy combos  are  known to create poor images  Remember the old saw     Gar   bag
233. rtScore will differentiate multiple voices  within a single staff line by displaying them with different colors   Voice 1 black  Voice 2 red  Voice 3 green  and Voice 4 blue  while   at the same time  creating an independent MIDI channel for each voice   The individual voice lines will    threaded    from the TIFF file  through  Recognition  to the ENF file  from the ENF file to the MIDI file  and  from the MIDI file back to the ENF file        256 USING SmartScore    Glossary             USING SmartScore    257    INDEX    Index    A   Accaciatura 81  accent   editing 159  160   playback 212  Accidental 253  accidentals  editing 136  235  accuracy  recognition 46  52  active staffline 11  78  153  226   230  active system 117  122  Apply To   System Manager 146  Apply New 146  arpeggio 161  Articulations 254  articulations 156   deleting 161   editing 159   multiple   inserting or deleting 161   palette button 211  Associate Image Files 232  Audio MIDI Setup 59  Auto Save 236    B  Bank  MIDI 255  Barline 253  barlines  bracketing 104  breaking 230  editing 87  repeat 165    beaming flagged notes 134  beams  changing angles and height 87   97  cross measure 153  cross staff voicing 152  Quick beaming 84  Begin Recognition Window 10  bowings 40  bracketing 103    C  Cap Lock 226  CD Writer 222  Change mode 13  Channel 255  chord  deleting single note from 133  splitting into voices 151  chord cluster tool 80  chord symbols 99  231  editing and adding 101  recognition of 99  c
234. rts  in black     NOTE  To quickly toggle between viewing voices in different colors  or all in black  push the Voice Color button in the SmartScore  toolbar or select Options  gt  Define Colors  gt  Voices     9 8 1 Options  gt  Color Mode  gt  Voice    The following table describes the relationships between color modes  and how parts and contrapuntal voices are assigned to MIDI channels     Table 5  Parts and Voices and their MIDI equivalents             Options  gt   Color Mode   MIDI Tracks MIDI Channels    Each Staff   One Track Each Voice   One Channel  Voice    4 Voice channels per Track       Part  gt  Black Each Staff   One Track One Voice per Track   Part  gt  Color                      USING SmartScore 1 49    sne th  BOOK    GUITAR    PIANO    Lf       Te    Yoos t    Vacs   Voce 4 i       3    Tr    p    Detailed ENF Editing    In Voice mode  contrapuntal voices display as one of four colors  Voice    1  black  Voice 2   red  Voice 3   green and Voice 4   blue   Voicelines  can then be extracted in either System Manager or in Score Structure     In Voice mode  each contrapuntal voiceline is assigned a unique MIDI  channel  This allows you to control each voice   s Volume  Balance and  MIDI instrument in the Playback Console     9 8 2 Overriding automatic voice colors    Voice colors are assigned automatically  but can be manually overrid   den     To override default voice color of a note or rest  change voice number      a  Select desired voice number  and color
235. ry  voice in the right hand is played  you will hear a harpsichord  sound  This technique is ideal for distinguishing    inner voices    of  parts that are written contrapuntally     NOTE  Changing MIDI instrument assignments of parts and voices  can also be accomplished in the Playback Console  Ctrl   9    Playback Menu  gt  Console      2 5 Manipulating a Multiple voice Score    Many scores are written with multiple voices within a staff line  Solo  piano  guitar and choral music typically include at least a few measures  that include different voices moving independently  What we refer to as     Voiceline Threading    allows you to track and manipulate contrapuntal   polyphonic  voices easily  SmartScore treats voices as fundamental  entities  not simply as notes with stems pointed in different directions     The sample file  CHORALE  is a famous Lutheran chorale  It has four  voices  Soprano  Alto  Tenor and Bass written in two staff lines  SA   TB     a  Push the Recog button on the Navigator    b  Press the Add Files to List button in the Begin Recognition win   dow  Select CHORALE TIF from the SmartScore folder in the  Open window and then press Open  In Options area  leave Trip   lets  Endings and Text Recognition unchecked     c  Press the Begin Recognition button  Once Recognition is com   plete  save the new ENF file  CHORALE ENF     In the upper staff  the Soprano voice is in black and the Alto voice is in  red  Because it is the first voice in the lower staff  th
236. s 134  Dynamics 137  Flags and Beams 135  Note Values 137  QuickSelect 132  Rests 137  Select Tool 133  Stem Direction 135  Ties 135  Tool Palettes 81  130  Tuplets 137  Unify Signatures Clefs 137    Vertical Alignment 65  Quick Tour 9  Quick Select 13  81   R   recognition   adding a staff missed by 119   bowings 40   endings 39   fretboard 40   hymnal fonts 40    join offset voices 40   languages 39   lyrics and text 39   lyrics under every staff 39  merging separated systems 121    options and preview tabs 38  pedals 39  poor 29  46  pre scanned music 43  relink parts 40  scanning music 9  System Report 10  triplets 39  record a CD 222  record new MIDI track 204  Refresh MIDI 72  178  refreshing ENF playback 177  Re link Parts 121  Relink Parts  after Unify 169  before inserting staff 119  Repeat previous measure mark  166  repeats  editing 165  repeats and endings 72  reset windows and palettes 80  Resolution  scanning 29  35  Rest 253  rests 77  132  associated with lyric block 94  multi measure 132  Rotate scanned image 52    S  SATB scores 20  Save ENF 90  218  Scanner Drivers for Macintosh 32  scanning music 25  HP scanners  OS X  32  Mac OS X 32  manual automatic 30  user interface 30       USING SmartScore    263    INDEX    score formats 251  Score from Scratch 89  Score Header 227  Score Structure 124  Score Part 124  226  251  scanning in 45  Segno 167  Piano Roll 195  Select Tool 133  shift pitch 15  shortcut conventions 11  Sibelius  exporting to 91  signature 
237. s a MIDI track number  To    the right  the Ch V column displays the voice number of the part track  inside a colored box corresponding to the color for that voice     b  In the Instrument column  click to select a new MIDI instru   ment     To change an instrument assignment of a voice in the System Manager     a  Open the System Manager  Ctrl  M   Cmnd   M  or select Sys   tem Manager from Edit menu  All staves are displayed in hori   zontal rows as    Parts     Voices are arranged in columns above  each part  1 thru 4      b  Find the voice within the part you want to change  Click the pull  down menu in MIDI instrument assigned to that part and voice   Select an alternative instrument from the pull down menu for that  voice  You will hear each voice stand out from other voices  within the same part staffline when played back  provided you  chose instruments with enough difference in their respective tim   bres        Let  Peije L Abb voce     Worm 2 ioa 5 ocd Sit Sb      ja me ri mm  F7 je Te is    Cena ning  Eauise     acta      FIGURE 4   8  Changing MIDI instrument of a voice in System Manager  4 4 3 Vertical Alignment and offset voices    In printed music  it is common for notes belonging to different voices  to appear horizontally offset from one another  Such offset notes are  clearly meant to sound simultaneously even if they are not aligned ver   tically  Such notes belong to different voices  may have opposite stem  directions and will appear horizontally offset 
238. s menu  highlight Measure Numbers     e None   removes all measure numbers from the ENF file     e Every Staff   displays a measure number for the first measure of  each system only     e Every Measure   displays a measure number at each barline     11 6 2 Options  gt  Color Mode    For detailed discussion of color modes  refer to page 149   Working  with Voices and Colors      e Voice  Each voice of a staff line will display in a different color   e By Part  Each staff line will display in a different color or in black   11 6 3 Define Colors    Voices  Define the colors used to identify each of four contrapuntal voices   e Part Color  Define the colors used while Color  gt  By Part is selected   e Background    Define the background color for the ENF pane or Image pane        234 USING SmartScore    Reference  e Hidden Symbols    Define the colors used to display objects while in    Hidden Symbols     mode  Main   Non note object color   Voices   Colors displayed for  each of 4 possible contrapuntal voices while in    Hidden Symbols     mode     11 6 4 Options  gt  Overlapping notes    Often two notes of different voices share the same pitch at the same  time  You can choose whether you want noteheads of different voices  to overlap one another or to become offset next to each other  To allow  overlapping noteheads  check off    Overlap Notes    in the Options  menu  Playback will not be affected whether note heads are offset or  overlap     11 6 5 Options  gt  Align Lyrics 
239. s offset voices which regularly exceed this dis   tance  choose another distance  Distance is determined by the  white space between note heads     e If your music has dense polyphonic texture  like that found in solo  guitar music or tightly spaced orchestral passages  it may be neces   sary to    tighten up    the allowable distance between offset voices   In these case  choose a distance less than 1 4 of a notehead     e Part Linking    When a score is    optimized     parts do not appear until actually played   Optimized scores have irregular numbers of parts  and staves  in sys   tems  As new parts are introduced  they are normally added to the top   e g  a vocal line appears on top after a piano introduction  However   sometimes parts are added to systems in a    bottom up    fashion  e g   existing staves are bumped upwards  If your score is structured in this  way  change default to    Add Parts to Bottom     However  this is rather  rare     e Fretboard Strings    The default fretboard for recognition is the six string guitar  If your  music has ukulele fretboards  4 strings  or some other configuration   change the selection to the correct number of strings        40 USING SmartScore    Scanning and Recognition    3 5 2 Post Recognition   Luk LE et Ll   Rearmed Erikin Pearl  P abiha dia m 1 ihan  Hiu Epien Poured      paste toured m J prire    Lgj rg ie ha eper ccd ee ej bee ed ae   cud of ee en rt ey cee dee Faai mm   Fareed coop Peu Tipsa ieee Di ja boae ered Pi G
240. save the  active SmartScore file  MIDI Type 1  Multiple Track   Multiple  Channel   MIDI Type 0  Single Track   Multiple Channel    FINALE or NIFF for Lime  NIFF for Sibelius  NIFF 6a or 6b     c  Browse to another directory and change the name if desired     d  Press OK  The file will be saved in the last directory used with  the    Save As    command  The extension is automatically added     NOTE  When saving ENF to MIDI files  a dialog box will open to  explain that articulations such as slurs  staccatos and tenutos  will create MIDI events that are not quantized  You will be  given a choice to save the MIDI files with articulations  removed or kept  For the purpose of playback only  it is rec   ommended that articulations be kept  If t is recommended that  articulations be removed if MIDI files are to be imported into  other notation based programs        USING SmartScore 91    Lyrics                               94  Text and Lyrics  Changing Styles and Entering                     96  Edit Shapes                             97  Guitar Frets and Chord Symbols                          99   Creating and changing chord symbols in the GCL             101  Bracketing                               103       92 USING SmartScore    Chapter 6 Editing Text and Symbols    During recognition of music  text characters found between stafflines  are assumed to be lyrics  Characters found outside stafflines are treated  as standard text fields  There are certain exceptions  For example 
241. selecting File  gt  Save  If Options  gt  Auto Save is on  incremental sav   ing becomes automatic  For more on Auto Save  turn to    Options  gt   Auto Save    on page 236  A rule of thumb for all files  especially big  ones  is    Be safe  Save often           90 USING SmartScore    Editing Notes and Rests  5 8 1 Saving ENF files as MIDI or other file types    mt   You can save SmartScore files in several different file formats such as  MIDI  Finale    NIFF for Sibelius    or standard NIFF files    PIANO  GUITAR e  MID files will import playback data into most other music soft   ware programs with no page formatting  All graphical informa   tion about note position  stem direction  voices  etc  are lost   MIDI is to music what ASCII is to text       FIN files will import SmartScore pages into Finale 2000c or better  with graphical information and page layout intact  Use the File  gt   Import selection in Finale to open a SmartScore  FIN file    e SmartScore saves several flavors of  NIF files  NIFF for Lime   NIFF for Sibelius and raw NIFF files  one conforming to the  NIFF  Notation Interchange File Format  Specification 6a as  published by the NIFF steering committee in 1998 and one to the  6b update  NIFF files contain both graphical and playback infor   mation and can be used as a means of exchanging music notation  and MIDI data between software programs that support the for   mat     a  Select File  gt  Save As     b  In the Filetype Format window  choose a format to 
242. siting      Refer to    Cross staff voicing    on  page 152     11 5 8 View  gt  Show Part Names  To display the part name or abbreviation on the left staffline margin     a  Selecting Show Part Names and Abbreviations displays Part  Names in the first system and the Part Abbreviations in subse   quent systems        230 USING SmartScore    Reference    b  Select Show Part Names Only or Part Numbers Only to dis     play just name or number in the Ist system and nothing more     NOTE  For information on selecting and modifying Part Names  see     Instrument Templates    on page 147     c  Selecting Do Not Show will nor display any Part Names or  abbreviations in the ENF display     11 5 9 View  gt  Chord Symbols  Select how inserted chord symbols should display     e Show Symbols and Frets displays guitar chord and symbol name   e Show Symbol displays only the symbol name   e Show Fretboard displays only the guitar chord     e Long Minor will display    min    instead of    m    for the word     minor        11 5 10 View  gt  True Scrolling    It is possible to view several pages at once with Print Preview  Select  this option either from the File or View menus or by pushing the    Print  Preview    button in the lower right hand corner of the ENF display    Pe aa  TL eS atte a         8 ER fee pa  E re    FIGURE 11   14  Print Preview  Horizontal Format       USING SmartScore 231    Reference    e Horizontal format    Select from View or push this button to view pages in hori
243. stallers can be  installed up to 5 times  using ID and Password  before it becomes nec   essary to call Customer Service to obtain a new download ID     a  Insert the SmartScore CD into your computer   s CD drive     b   Windows  Push Start  gt  Run and Browse to find your CD drive  under    Look In     Double click SS3INSTALL EXE     c   Macintosh  Double click SmartScore CD icon on your desktop   Double click SS3INSTALL     d  Follow all installation steps including entering Serial Number   Customer ID and registering your copy of the product     2 2 Recognition of Scanned Music    SmartScore includes several pre scanned TIFF files  Launch Smart   Score by double clicking its icon  We will start the tutorial with the  sample pre scanned file  FANDANGO     a  Find the Navigator toolbar and push the Recognition button   Navigator    efi i 2    ga o     Open Scanff Recogf Unify Score Record Korocke Tile CO Miter       FIGURE 2   1  Navigator toolbar       USING SmartScore 9    Installation and Quick Tour    The Begin Recognition window opens  This is the window you will  use to select previously scanned music for recognition     Feces Cpi     i la  Fri  Ly Lies Lord Paahi gl Series  fel laih    kmri    Pinas    S Liaw apes Ca    iye Eya teary     aiian i ee    Pee Leer   itd ropes parts indi      Perth ierg          FIGURE 2   2  Begin Recognition window    b  Press Add Files to List  In the Open dialog box  double click on  the sample file  FANDANGO TIF  inside the SmartScore
244. t Play Range    You can have playback begin on any measure in the ENF file or you  can specify a range of measures for playback     To set a playback start point or to select a range for playback     a  Select Playback  gt  Set Play Range and click the Play Range  radio button     b  In the From field  choose a starting measure  To establish a range  for playback  select an end point in the To pull down box     r Myf  ba Aj A mee    r Ppa T t  p  Co  co    FIGURE 4   18  Set Playback Range       c  To repeat playback over the range  check the Loop box   4 5 9 Dynamics    You can use any of the tools in the    Dynamics    palette to alter play   back velocities  Inserting dynamic  crescendo   decrescendo markings  or hairpins will alter the velocity of associated notes in the active  staffline only  See    To Insert a Dynamic marking     on page 157 for  details on inserting dynamics        USING SmartScore 71    ENF Playback    To apply dynamics and or dynamic markings to more than one staff   enter the dynamic in each active staff that you wish to apply the effect   If you do not wish to have so many dynamics visible in every staffline   you may enter symbols in the Hidden Symbols mode  For more details   see    Hidden Symbols    on page 155     4 5 10 Articulations    Numerous note articulations including slurs  trills  turns  mordents   staccatos  tenutos  accents  arpeggios  glissandos and tremolos can be  applied from the    Articulations    palette  For more information
245. t operate properly   go to    Choosing an alternative scanning interface    on page 30     c  Push the Scan button in the Navigator or in the Main Toolbar     a  B 2   amp     ecog Unify Score peel ie MIDI   Tile   CO Miter       FIGURE 3   2  Scan Button  3 2 1 Using the SmartScore Scanning Interface    Your scanner will begin to operate with Scan or File  gt  Scan Music  gt   Acquire  A low resolution pre scan will appear in the Preview window  along with a black bounding box surrounding the music  The bounding  box should encompass the entire image area that you wish to scan   Edges of the box should be about 1 4    away from the printed image        FIGURE 3   3  SmartScore scanning interface    NOTE  Ifthe preview image appears with white notes on black back   ground  this means your scanner is reversing image polarity   In this case  you will want to check the box  Invert Image   below the Preview window        26 USING SmartScore    Scanning and Recognition    d  To resize the bounding box  click and drag any of the 4 sides so  there is at least 1 4    of white space between the bounding box  and the music which you are scanning     e  To scan more than one page  make sure Multiple is checked     f  Push the Scan button to create a final high resolution scan of first  page  You will be prompted to scan additional pages  Push Next  Page and continue to preview  deskew and scan until you have  finished scanning in your song  project  section or movement   Select Finish w
246. tallation       gt a so 5s Sone Be Se See et 9  Recognition of Scanned Music                         9  System Report                             10  ENF Editing                           11  Playback                               14  Changing Instrument sounds                       17  Working with the System Manager                     18  Changing Parts and MIDI instruments                         19  Manipulating a Multiple voice Score                        20  Extracting Parts and Voices                      21  Editing Lyrics and Text                           21  Editing three or more voices                         22  Open MIDI View                           23  Viewing all open windows using Tile                 23  Chapter 3  Scanning and Recognition                 25  Scanning Music                                 25  Scanning in Windows                             25  Using the SmartScore Scanning Interface                     26    Automatic image enhancement functions                     27       Table of Contents    Scanner settings                         29  Choosing an alternative scanning interface                     30  Working with HP Scanners in Windows                   31  Scanning for Macintosh                             32  Scanner drivers for Mac                    32  Selecting a scanner                          33  Selecting the SmartScore Scanning Interface                   33  Choosing Your Scanner   s Interface  Automatic               34 
247. tch shift evis series  2 eraser eB ere Bye ee ee as 83  Editing beamed notes                           84  Stem direction           sis Shee ee eee eS 85  Dots of Prolongation                          85  Tuplets and Slurs  Legatos                       85  Ties                               86  Barlines Soara Fate ree te celina oe ts ett OO  ca deep oes x ade E 87  Edit Shapes    siate t Bi seem e aE a oe E eree i 87  Key and Clef Transposition                         87  Creating a New ENF Score from Scratch                88  Saving and Exporting an ENF File                    90  Saving ENF files as MIDI or other file types                   91       76    USING SmartScore    al      Bi    2l    Chapter 5 Editing Notes and Rests    This section is intended to give you a brief overview of ENF editor    functions  Turn to Section Chapter 9   Detailed ENF Editing  on  page 129 for more     5 1 Navigating Inside an ENF Document  5 1 1 Zoom    To Zoom in and out     e Click the Zoom Tool in the Main Toolbar  Ctrl   Q  Cmnd   Q  for Mac  will toggle between In and Out    e Click will increase the scale of your view  Zoom In   while right   click  option   click for Mac  will decrease the scale of your  view  Zoom Out      NOTE  An alternative to the    split screen    view is the    Zoom Win   dow    view  See    Split screen and Zoom Window Viewing     on page 129 for more details     5 1 2 Paging    TIP  Itis possible to view several pages at once with either File  gt   Print
248. te contains up to date information on all our products   You may register online and download posted updates  Also  you may e   mail Musitek Customer Service for upgrade information  to notify us of a  change in your address or request other product related information     e http   www musitek com  e sales musitek com  e OFFICE   805  646 8051   FAX   805  646 8099    e 410 Bryant Circle   Suite K   Ojai  CA 93023 4200    Most solutions to technical issues can be found in the manual or by access   ing FAQs from our website  To contact a specialist  send e mail either  from the website or from your own e mailer  To contact a specialist by  phone  call during the hours listed below  If you are located outside the  U S  or Canada  contact your local Musitek dealer  You may also FAX us  your questions     e www musitek com techsup html  e tech musitek com    e Phone   805  646 5841   FAX   805  646 8099  10 AM to 4 PM Pacific Time   Monday thru Friday    Notices    Musitek    and its licensors retain all ownership rights to the SmartScore for Window   s    and Macintosh    computer program and other computer programs offered by  Musitek including all associated documentation and materials  Use of SmartScore is  governed by the license agreement printed on the envelope containing your original  media  The SmartScore source code is a confidential trade secret of Musitek  You  may not attempt to decipher  reverse engineer or decompile SmartScore or develop  source code for SmartScor
249. tes and rests       USING SmartScore 1 5 5    Lane    Janes  Adage    vrs fTlll    Detailed ENF Editing    with changed voice assignments will remain invisible after you exit  Hidden Symbols     To override voice numbers in Hidden Symbols     a  Select a voice color and number from the Voice Color tool   b  Click on any note or rest to change its voice number and color   NOTE  In Hidden Symbols mode  voice colors display differently  than in normal edit mode   Voice  1   Grey  Voice  2   Purple  Voice  3   Yellow   Voice  4   Aqua  To change the default color of Hidden Symbols     a  Select Options  gt  Define Colors  gt  Hidden Symbols  b  Choose a new color and push OK     9 11 Dynamics  Articulations and Tempo Markings    NOTE  Dynamic  Articulation and Tempo markings affect ENF play   back and change the resulting MIDI file  Playback properties  of individual markings may be adjusted singly or globally  with the use of the Properties Tool  See 9 12 on page 162     e Dynamic markings affect the volume of a range of notes in the  active staff  MIDI track  to which they are entered     e Articulation markings  such as trills  staccatos  tenutos  arpeg   gios  glissandos and mordents are note specific     e Tempo changes are global and cannot be applied to one staffline     9 11 1 Tempo Markings  Metronome Mark     NOTE  Inserting a tempo marking is generally used as a    change of   tempo    indicator  Default tempo is normally set by going to  the Edit  gt  Tempo menu or to
250. the default time  signature         Heatre  Yuen 7        bee Ges ia iret nee vce   Cheri tiered ipo  memg m  n oreo es Ferh krer rran pe    FIGURE 5   3  Error Check window    To check for errors based on total voice durations     a  Press Ctrl  E Win   Cmnd   E Mac  Or select Edit  gt  Error  Check  The first measure found with a discrepancy will highlight  in grey  The Error Check window will suggest whether there are  too many or too few note values in a particular voice in a given  measure     b  Click into the ENF page and correct the indicated voiceline   NOTE  It may be necessary to click twice in the ENF display to    change    cursor focus    from the Error Check window to ENF  display   c  Select Resume to continue  Click back into ENF to regain     focus        NOTE  Very often publishers will leave one voiceline incomplete  when there are two or more voices within a measure  to avoid  cluttering a measure with rests   SmartScore may success   fully cope with such a situation provided voices are vertically  aligned     d  Choose Ignore to skip the indicated voiceline discrepancy or  Quit   5 4 7 Pitch shift  To change the pitch of any note     e Hold down the    Shift    key  click and drag a notehead up or  down        USING SmartScore 83       Editing Notes and Rests    NOTE  To move objects horizontally  activate Edit Shapes from the    Text and Controllers Toolbar  See    Edit Shapes    on page 87   5 4 8 Editing beamed notes    e Inserting and deleting beamed
251. the pattern to begin and    enter it into the Beginning Measure field     Decide how many measures you wish the pattern to contain and  enter it in the Length  in Measures  field  This is a very impor   tant decision if you want to have proper sounding patterns     Click Generate to add the pattern to the library  It   s name will  then appear in the Automatic Drum Pattern window     Add    fills    to longer patterns  8 or 12 measures   Repeated fills  in patterns having 1 or 2 measures usually sound dumb        USING SmartScore    Working with Drums    e Importing MIDI drum patterns       a  Push the Open button in the Navigator  File  gt  Open  and click to   Open select MIDI from the    Files of Type    pull down menu  Browse to  a MIDI file containing a drum track and double click    b  Push the Play button to hear the MIDI file play back  Push Close    c  The imported MIDI file will appear in the MIDI Overview win   dow     d  Repeat the process from Step d  above     7 3 Virtual Drum Kit    This option allows you to create a drum track to accompany any ENF  playback without requiring a drum machine or any other external MIDI  device  It maps selected MIDI drum sounds to the keys of your com   puter keyboard  MIDI quantization to sixteenth notes is applied by  default  For more information about quantization  see    Snap to    on  page 204     7 3 1 Recording a virtual drum track  To create a virtual MIDI drum track in ENF     a  Select Options  gt  Virtual Drum Kit    
252. their harmonic equivalents     e Keep Line Space    This choice will retain exact relationships between intervals after trans   position is completed  Accidentals will generally remain fixed  No  attempt will be made to swap harmonic equivalents of accidentals  For  example  c and d  may transpose up to c  and d double       e Transpose Symbols    To transpose guitar fret and chord symbols to match the new target key   check this box  This selection will also move articulations  such as  slurs  up or down along with notes and rests  If necessary  guitar fret  and chord symbols may move up to avoid collisions with upwardly   transposed notes     e Ask For New Chord Symbol    This option allows you to accept or change each transposed guitar fret  and chord symbol during transposition  Use this option when you know  you won   t accept default fretboard patterns or when you know you will  need to add new fret and chord symbols to the library     e Adjust Stems    Stem directions will be maintained unless this box is checked  It is  important to remember  however  that adjusting the direction of stems  may create voicing problems  Automatic voiceline recognition relies  heavily on stem directions  Flipping stems as they cross the mid staff  point can create unexpected results  Best Bet  Adjust Stems   Off  Use  Undo  Ctrl   Z   Cmnd   Z for Mac  if necessary        USING SmartScore 141    Detailed ENF Editing    e Move Notes    Uncheck this box to leave the notes in their original
253. to the Left    Lyric fields are normally center aligned to their associated note or rest   Choose this option to left align lyrics  All lyric fields will be affected     11 6 6 Options  gt Melisma    Select Dash or Underline for how you wish lyric melisma lines should  be displayed     11 6 7 Options  gt  Accidental Stacking Rule  You may choose two alternative methods of stacking accidentals   e Diagonal    Applies the rule that adjacent accidentals should be positioned as  closely as possible to each other and become diagonally offset     e Zig Zag    Attempts to arrange accidentals in back and forth rows no more than  three spaces wide     11 6 8 Options  gt Triplet Angle    Select Flat  Beamed  Round or None for how you wish tuplet brackets  are be displayed  With None selected  the division number appears but  without any bracket        USING SmartScore 235    Reference    11 6 9 Options  gt  Virtual Drum Kit    Refer to    Recording a virtual drum track    on page 111     11 6 10 Options  gt  Virtual Drum Kit Definition  Refer to    Defining Virtual Drum Kit    on page 112     11 6 11 Options  gt  Auto Save    Open ENF files are automatically saved as a backup file  Should your  computer crash or a session somehow becomes interrupted  you will be  prompted that a previous version was detected when you reopen Smart   Score  If so  accept the backup and save it     You may change how frequently you want to Auto Save to backup your  current ENF file     Auo on Ope Ei  Smee
254. to the Segno      Checking the Segno box will place a Segno in a measure  Playback will  stop with this measure     e Fine    Fine means final or end  It denotes the last measure of a score when  repeats are used     e d c  al fine    Check the Jump to box and select d c  or Da Capo  from the begin   ning  and al fine  to the end   After this measure is played  MIDI play   back will jump to the beginning of the score and continue playback to  the end     Use the Fine check box to insert a fine into a measure  MIDI playback  will stop at the end of this measure     e d s  al fine    A Fine can be inserted after a Segno when the Segno is used to mark  the beginning of the repeated section     Checking the Segno box will place a Segno in a measure     Activate the Jump check box and select d s  or Dal Segno  from  Segno  and al fine  to the end   After this measure is played  MIDI  playback will jump to the Segno measure     Check the Fine box to insert a fine in a measure  MIDI playback will  play through the score  return to the Segno measure  and stop after the  Fine measure is played     e Jump    Jump can be used to    send    MIDI playback to a certain measure        196 USING SmartScore    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    Select to Measure in order to jump to a chosen measure during play   back     On Pass will send MIDI playback to the selected measure on the desig   nated pass only     NOTE  Check On Pass if the d s   d c  or the Jump measure falls  within a repeated sect
255. ttes                      75rrrnrnn 211   ENF FILE Menu ss       a c e006     eteieee Ge she ese SS 218   ENF EDIT Menu 6 6 S26 ete e eae  Soe ee ee ee 223   ENF VIEW Menu                         229   ENF OPTIONS Menu                           234   ENF PLAYBACK Menu           4 44 5244 452245 237   ENF Help Menu                           238   MIDI FILE Menu s2 e0e 6  25 ee Soe eo eee ee Se 239   MIDI EDIT Menu                        240   MIDI VIEW Menu             7777777   5 241   MIDI OPTIONS Menu                         242   OMS  Mac Classic Only                          243   MIDI REALTIME Menu                         244   MIDI WINDOW Menu                        245   Image File Menu Items                         245   Image EDIT Menu                         246   Image VIEW Menu                            248   Image REALTIME Menu                         249   Glossary               e eeee ee eee 251   Score Formats  Ses Seah see SS erdnses Se ee ee eres acer 251       USING SmartScore 6    Table of Contents    Score Components                             252  Other Notational Terms                           254  MIDI Terms                               255  SmartScore Terms                            259  Index                                     258       7 USING SmartScore    Table of Contents          USING SmartScore    oo    What SmartScore does                               So  what do you want todo                         What   s new with Version 3 0      
256. ue     Big E  FI      Written Played       FIGURE 11   7  Glissando   11 2 3 Clefs    In Insert mode  select amy clef from the    Clefs    palette  Click any       where in the active staff to insert the selected clef        USING SmartScore 213    Reference    In Change mode  clicking on an existing clef to change to selected clef   Note that playback becomes updated  Notes do not reposition them   selves when a clef is changed either by a change of clef sign or by Uni   fying Clefs    To Delete a clef  press the    X    key and click on the clef     NOTE  See    Unify Signatures Clefs  U     on page 137 for more  details on how to update clefs throughout all remaining sys   tems    e Alto   Tenor   Mezzo soprano     C     clefs   The midpoint of the    C    clef indicates where C below middle C  MIDI   C3  is to be located    e Treble Octava   Bass Octava clefs   Playback in these clefs will be an octave higher than with a standard   clef    e Treble Octavo   Bass Octavo clefs   Playback in these clefs will be an octave lower than with a standard   clef    e Octava   Octavo tools    These are not clefs per se  Rather than insert with a mouse click  they  are applied to selected notes by dragging to select the notes to be modi   fied  Playback of selected notes will be an octave higher when selecting  with Octava tool and an octave lower when selecting with an Octavo  tool     To assign Octava or Octavo to a range of selected notes    a  Select either Octava or Octavo tool  
257. uencing    To sum up     Changes in ENF view automatically update MIDI display   Changes in MIDI view update ENF playback only  not its dis   play    In MIDI view  choosing View  gt  Convert MIDI to ENF will cre   ate a new ENF document based only on MIDI file data    NOTE  Page formatting will be lost in the new ENF document   but the source ENF document will remain open and unchanged   Close MIDI views  icons appear in upper left hand corner  to  return display to ENF notation view  Changes made in MIDI  environment will be kept until Refresh MIDI is invoked    In ENF view  Playback  gt  Refresh MIDI updates playback  based on the current ENF display only  MIDI Refresh is per   formed whenever an ENF file is opened or when the spacebar is  used for playback after MIDI editing  Select    Save As MIDI    to  save current playback as a MIDI file  Choose    Keep MIDI    to  ignore refresh and temporarily retain changes made in MIDI  environment  Choose    Refresh and Continue    to discard  changes made in MIDI and refresh playback based only on ENF  display        Yu ire boul to Fih HE haah allow ra   F yoa ee oe charger such ar se keis cham hen ie DT     yoa seh fo choco al reeled A Ci ch ne   F yim be oo kaap M aa MI day chee Lee AD    Dem a i   Aterh ened Contre   le Kap w   FIGURE 10   1  Refresh MIDI based on ENF display  Changes made in MIDI will be kept in ENF playback until MIDI  Refresh is activated either by hitting the spacebar for playback or  when closing and reop
258. un SmartScore   s MIDI recording from an external timer   select External Timer from the Realtime menu     10 9 6 Setting Punch In and Punch Out points    To set Punch In and Punch Out points for recording  double click any  measure number in an Overview or Piano Roll  The Measure Settings  window will open     e Check Punch In to start recording at the beginning of this mea   sure     e Check Punch Out to set this measure as the last measure for  recording        USING SmartScore 205    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    The Punch In and Out points are marked with red triangles in the Over   view and Piano Roll displays     10 10 Step Time Recording    Recording a    live    MIDI performance to a metronome may be very  useful to an accomplished keyboardist  but many of us do not have the  timing skills required to record a performance meaningful enough for  conversion to notation  Even if using    Snap to    quantization will result  in note positions that are offset with a mix of strange note values and   usually  many rests  A logical alternative to live recording is Step Time  Recording  Using this method  you will be able to quickly select exact  note durations as well as    skips     rests  from the number pad of your  computer keyboard  With your other hand  enter notes and chords from  your MIDI keyboard or MIDI instrument     To activate Step Time Recording     a  Make sure your MIDI keyboard or MIDI instrument is properly  connected to your computer and that it or its i
259. ush Set button next to Instrument column header   b  Choose Instruments or Drums tab and select from preset list     c  Push Custom to reassign to external names if required     9 10 Hidden Symbols    Hidden symbols displays every possible object in the ENF display  Cer   tain markings such as the range of a 8va  8vb  ritard  accelerando or  decelerando are only visible when Hidden Symbols is active  You may  want certain notation objects to be applied to playback  but at the same  time  you may not want these symbols to be visible  For example  you  may need to insert rests to    fill out    a given voiceline in a measure  but  you do not want these    placeholder    rests to be printed     To insert a hidden notation object     a  Push the Hide Show Symbol button in the Text and Controllers  toolbar  Insert any notation object normally  Symbols entered in  Hidden Symbols will appear as a brown color     To view ranges of dynamics and tempos     a  Push the Hide Show Symbol button  Dynamics or tempos which  were applied to a range of notes will appear as follows     FIGURE 9   13  Hidden range of an accelerando    Push again to exit Hidden Symbols mode     Hidden    symbols do not  appear in normal mode and will not print     9 10 1 Changing Voice assignments in Hidden Symbols    You may find that it is necessary to change the assigned voice color   and number  of a hidden symbol after it is entered  If so  simply use  the Voice Color tool found in the SmartScore toolbar  No
260. ving col   lapsed or expanded systems     8 1 4 Super System    The Super System always represents the total number of potential  instruments  Adding or removing parts is normally done from the Super  System and not from active system displayed in the System Manager     To add a new part to the score  System Manager  gt  Super System    a  Select Edit  gt  System Manager  Ctrl   M  Cmnd M Mac       b  Choose Super from the Controlling System pull down menu                Potreven T a M ipg   Ape Te    cP geen New vt          FIGURE 8   6  Inserting a new part using Super System in System Manager    c  Select the part you wish to add a part next to by clicking on the  black dot to the left of the part  Apply to  All should be selected    d  Choose Insert Above or Insert Below  Then press Apply    e  Switch Controlling System back to Active  Notice the newly  added part is added  but is NOT checked for visibility     NOTE  Parts are not visible in ENF until Visibility is applied to one  or more systems  See    Controlling Part Visibility and Part  Linking    on page 147 for details on making part visible        11 8 USING SmartScore    Changing Score Structure  8 1 5 Changing line  staff and system spacing    You can change the distances between the lines in a staff as well as dis   tances between staves and systems from inside the System Manager   Changes can be applied to the active system or to all subsequent sys   tems     a  Position your cursor over the system which you w
261. ving the cursor to the  Edit menu     NOTE  Only the active system is affected when inserting or removing  a staff  Remaining systems do not change  Change visibility  in the System Manager and apply to Score Part to update all  systems     TIP  Keep in mind that when you add a part to a system  you are also  adding a new part to the score  When adding a part to a system   the new part will not be visible in any system except the active  system  See    Super System    on page 118     11 4 15 Edit  gt  Score Part    Use this feature to append a new Score Part to the ENF document   When a new Score Part is added  it will begin playback at measure  1  along with all other Score Parts that have been created  For definition  of Score Part  see Score Part on page 251     11 4 16 Edit  gt  Unify Signatures  U   Refer to    Unify Key  Time and Clefs  U     on page 169        226 USING SmartScore    Reference  11 4 17 Edit  gt  Format Score    This is a kind of    cleanup    tool that attempts to horizontally reposition  notes and rests  Does not    roll    objects from one system to another     11 4 18 Edit  gt  Instrument Templates  Ctrl S or Cmnd S   Refer to    Instrument Templates    on page 147     11 4 19 Edit  gt  Score Header  To enter a Score Header at the top of the first page of the ENF file           FIGURE 11   13  Score Header   a  Select Title and type in the name of the score    b  Select Composer and type in the name of the composer    c  Type a part name if it is a 
262. w  gt  Cascade    Layers all open windows within main SmartScore window  Active win   dow is stacked on top     11 18 14 View  gt  Tile  Arranges all open windows to fit within main SmartScore window   Windows are arranged from left to right  top to bottom starting with the  active window     11 19 Image REALTIME Menu    11 19 1 Realtime  gt  Thru  Allows MIDI input to sound while recording        USING SmartScore 249    Score Formats                              251    Score Components                             252  Other Notational Terms                             254  MIDI Terms                                255  SmartScore Terms                             256       250 USING SmartScore    Chapter 12 Glossary    12 1 Score Formats    Score   A musical piece compiled as a document  A score usually con   tains more than one part with all the parts to be played together  In  SmartScore  it is a single computer file  an ENF file  A hand written  score is called a manuscript     Part   A part is represented by a staff line either alone  solo part  or  grouped into a system with other instruments  ensemble part   A part is  usually an single instrument  but in the case of two handed instruments   piano  organ  xylophone  etc    it may represent one hand   s part     Voice   Derived from choral music but applied to instrumental music as  well  contrapuntal voicing  sometimes referred to as polyphonic voic   ing  refers to a unique melodic thread distinct from other voices in
263. w is checked  Then  click on the appropriate ENF page in the list of ENF pages     d  Push the Associate button to associate the image page with the  appropriate ENF page  Continue as necessary     11 5 12 View  gt  Image Information    Provides information on the structure and type of the currently dis   played image file     e Next Page   Displays next page of ENF document   e Previous Page   Displays previous page of ENF document  e Go to Page  Ctrl  G   Cmnd G     Presents a dialog box to select a page number to jump to  Refer to    Pag   ing    on page 77 for details        Zoom    Lists available view percentages  Changing zoom will affect both the  image and the ENF file simultaneously  Range is from 8  to 400   view scale     11 5 13 View  gt  Zoom Window    Provides options for the floating zoom window including whether to  display ENF or TIFF close ups in the zoom window and selecting addi   tional zoom views  Refer to page 129   Split screen and Zoom Window  Viewing  for details on the floating zoom window     11 5 14 New MIDI View  Ctrl  I   Cmnd lI   Opens New MIDI View dialog box  Select type of MIDI view        USING SmartScore 233    Reference  e Overview   Displays all staves as MIDI tracks   e Piano Roll   Displays selected stave as MIDI track   e Event List   Displays MIDI events of selected staff line     11 6 ENF OPTIONS Menu    11 6 1 Options  gt Measure Numbers    There are several options for displaying measure numbers in an ENF  file  Under the Option
264. xtracting voices or for creating different voice textures during  playback     1 3 4 What Edition does what     Not all SmartScore editions can accomplish everything listed above   Excluding SmartScore Pro  all other editions have limitations  The fol   lowing chart lists the limitations of each edition     Table 1  SmartScore Edition Limitations                            Limited Number   Text  amp    Print Guitar Score MIDI    Edition of Lyrics and Structure Drum  Feature Set   Staves Chord Tracks    Symbol Virtual  Drums  SmartScore 32 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes  Pro  Songbook 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes  Edition  Piano 2 No Yes No No No  Edition  Guitar 1 No Yes Yes No No  Edition  MIDI 4 No No No No Yes  Edition                                  4 USING SmartScore    Introduction to SmartScore  1 3 5 Parts and Voices in SmartScore    A careful analysis of the structure of music notation reveals that there  are two fundamental elements on which all other musical components  are built  Voices and Parts  The following table describes their interre   lationships in the context of printed music notation  See the Glossary  on page 251 for more detailed descriptions of these terms     Table 2  How parts and voices are handled in SmartScore          Keneit Contained Visible MIDI  Inside  Components    Representation  Part Systems Staves Track  Voice Staves Notes   Rests Channel                      SmartScore is based on these relationships  The ability to track these  basic components throug
265. yback tempo to the default speed     SON  B00    e Play button initiates resumes playback of the active MIDI file   Once playback has begun  the Play button becomes Pause  Use  this button to retain MIDI data after returning to ENF display     Pause will stop playback without rewinding to the beginning of  the score  Hitting Play again will resume playback     re initialized at 0  rewinds to the beginning      Rewind button resets playback to the beginning of the playback  range     e The Record button will create a new MIDI track and will launch  a new recording session  When Record is lit  press Play button to  begin recording a new MIDI performance to a new track  When  recording to a new MIDI track  existing MIDI data  instruments   channels and transpositions of the original ENF or imported  MIDI file will be maintained     E  e Stop button stops playback recording of the MIDI  Play Record is       1 82 USING SmartScore    MIDI Editing and Sequencing    NOTE  All playback functions are also available in the Realtime  menu  in MIDI  or Playback menu  in ENF      TIP  To select an entire track for cutting and pasting  go to Overview  7 and click  option   click for Mac  in the track   s Name field     10 4 3 MIDI Devices  To set the MIDI input and output devices   a  Select MIDI Devices from the Options menu  The MIDI  Devices window will open   E Cancel         Input  Output        OPL3 S4 MPU MIDLIN   Roland Serial MIDI Input OPL3 SA FM MIDI   TTS Virtual Piano In OPL3 S
266. zontal for   mat     e Vertical format    Select from View or push this button to view pages in vertical format     11 5 11 View  gt Associate Image Files    Synchronization between the ENF and TIFF panes assumes exact ENF  correspondence to the original score structure  Synchronization may  become lost after systems are inserted  removed or if page margins are  changed  Once a system rolls from one page to another  ENF TIFF syn   chronization will become lost for all subsequent pages     TIP  To keep ENF to TIFF panes synchronized for as long as possi   ble  complete all ENF editing before inserting systems  Edit  gt   System  gt  Insert   Synchronization may be regained by resizing  top and or bottom margins in Page Setup after making small  changes  e g  after altering line spacing  Refer to    File  gt  Page  Setup    on page 220 for more details on controlling page mar   gins     To synchronize ENF and TIFF views     a  Go to View  gt  Associate Image Files             hai SPER RTE fe   page Armie Seng Tl  p   a Cote erage page kr acre  dji       Lad  Com      FIGURE 11   15  Associate Image File Window       232 USING SmartScore    Reference    b  Push Add to locate the TIF file associated with the open docu   ment  Browse your computer to find the image file  If the file  contains several pages of images  they will appear as xxxP1   xxxP2  xxxP3  etc     c  Click to highlight a page in the image page list  A preview of the  page will appear in the view window if Previe
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
TMS320C54x DSKPLUS DSP STARTER KIT USER'S GUIDE  Harbor Freight Tools 67024 User's Manual  Wireless Weather Station with World Time Clock  プロスタイル1200L/1200L  SDLR Dossier 13/14  Kat. Nr. 30.3034  Badgy200 System User Manual  Manual Transmisiones Alta Frec.  Rexel Multifile Extra A4 Suspension File 15mm Assorted (10)  FSH-2, FSH-2A, FSH-2A-99, FSH-2A-99W    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file